Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ToolBookHelp - ToolBook Catalog Objects Fully Explained
ToolBookHelp - ToolBook Catalog Objects Fully Explained
FULLY EXPLAINED
for
TOOLBOOK 8.5
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 7 MY BACKGROUND ............................................................................................................................. 7 VARIOUS THOUGHTS .......................................................................................................................... 8 Target Audience ............................................................................................................................ 8 Syntax Error .................................................................................................................................. 8 Dont Quit Your Day Job .............................................................................................................. 8 Technical Support ......................................................................................................................... 8 Other Books................................................................................................................................... 8 CATALOG BASICS ........................................................................................................................... 9 CATALOG ........................................................................................................................................... 9 Showing the Catalog ..................................................................................................................... 9 Closing the Catalog....................................................................................................................... 9 Minimizing the Catalog............................................................................................................... 10 Un-Minimizing the Catalog......................................................................................................... 10 Undocking the Catalog................................................................................................................ 11 Docking the Catalog.................................................................................................................... 11 Resizing the Catalog.................................................................................................................... 11 CATEGORIES..................................................................................................................................... 12 ToolTips....................................................................................................................................... 12 Showing/Hiding Categories ........................................................................................................ 13 CATALOG OBJECTS .......................................................................................................................... 14 ToolTips....................................................................................................................................... 14 Showing/Hiding Objects.............................................................................................................. 15 Adding New Objects .................................................................................................................... 15 CATALOG OBJECT DETAILS ..................................................................................................... 17 BONUS - FREE CATEGORIES ............................................................................................................. 19 Bullets.......................................................................................................................................... 19 LIBRARY.TBK ............................................................................................................................. 20 Progress Bars.............................................................................................................................. 21 Question Images.......................................................................................................................... 22 Scrapbook.................................................................................................................................... 23 ACTION OBJECTS.............................................................................................................................. 25 Simulation.................................................................................................................................... 26 Action Trigger ............................................................................................................................. 36 Reset Trigger ............................................................................................................................... 38 Delay ........................................................................................................................................... 40 Action Timer................................................................................................................................ 41 Choose Browser .......................................................................................................................... 45 Exit .............................................................................................................................................. 46 Exit with Confirmation ................................................................................................................ 47 Run Application........................................................................................................................... 48 Open Document........................................................................................................................... 49 Play Audio with Bullets 1 & 2..................................................................................................... 50 Bullet Text Level 1 (1)(2)(3) and Level 2 (1)(2)(3) ..................................................................... 51 ASPEN CDS - LXS........................................................................................................................... 55 Add A Link................................................................................................................................... 56
ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 1
Add A Note .................................................................................................................................. 57 Ask An Expert .............................................................................................................................. 58 Exit .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Home ........................................................................................................................................... 60 View Glossary ............................................................................................................................. 61 View Help .................................................................................................................................... 62 View Personal Feedback............................................................................................................. 63 BUTTONS .......................................................................................................................................... 65 Pushbutton................................................................................................................................... 66 Command .................................................................................................................................... 67 Shadow ........................................................................................................................................ 68 Rounded....................................................................................................................................... 69 Rectangle..................................................................................................................................... 70 Checkbox 3D ............................................................................................................................... 71 Radio Button................................................................................................................................ 72 Checkbox ..................................................................................................................................... 73 Radio Button 3D.......................................................................................................................... 74 Label............................................................................................................................................ 75 DRAW OBJECTS ................................................................................................................................ 77 Triangle ....................................................................................................................................... 78 Square.......................................................................................................................................... 79 Pentagon...................................................................................................................................... 80 Hexagon ...................................................................................................................................... 81 Octagon ....................................................................................................................................... 82 Freeform Polygon ....................................................................................................................... 83 Circle........................................................................................................................................... 84 Ellipse.......................................................................................................................................... 85 Rectangle..................................................................................................................................... 86 Rounded Rectangle...................................................................................................................... 87 Freeform Angled Line ................................................................................................................. 88 Simple Curve ............................................................................................................................... 89 Arc ............................................................................................................................................... 90 Pie................................................................................................................................................ 91 Line.............................................................................................................................................. 92 Angled Line ................................................................................................................................. 93 Complex Curve............................................................................................................................ 94 MEDIA (ANIMATED)......................................................................................................................... 95 Animated Helicopter ................................................................................................................... 96 Animated Top .............................................................................................................................. 97 Animated Globe........................................................................................................................... 98 Animated Gears........................................................................................................................... 99 Animated Clock ......................................................................................................................... 100 MEDIA (BACKDROPS)..................................................................................................................... 101 All Backdrops ............................................................................................................................ 102 MEDIA (CLIP ART) ......................................................................................................................... 103 All Clip Art ................................................................................................................................ 105 MEDIA (ICONS) .............................................................................................................................. 107 All Icons..................................................................................................................................... 108 MEDIA (TILED BACKDROPS) .......................................................................................................... 109
2
All Backdrops ............................................................................................................................ 110 MEDIA PLAYERS ............................................................................................................................ 111 Universal Media Player ............................................................................................................ 112 Popup Media Player.................................................................................................................. 116 Flash Media Player................................................................................................................... 118 Popup Flash Player................................................................................................................... 119 Correct Feedback...................................................................................................................... 120 Incorrect Feedback ................................................................................................................... 121 Streaming RealPlayer ............................................................................................................... 122 Streaming MPlayer ................................................................................................................... 123 Video Player 1, 2, 3................................................................................................................... 124 Popup Video 160x120, 240x180, 320x240................................................................................ 126 Video-Text Synchronizer ........................................................................................................... 128 Play Media Player..................................................................................................................... 130 Pause Media Player .................................................................................................................. 131 Stop Media Player..................................................................................................................... 132 Stop All Media........................................................................................................................... 133 Streaming Popup-Player ........................................................................................................... 134 Video Stage................................................................................................................................ 135 Hotword 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.............................................................................................................. 136 Icon 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6..................................................................................................................... 138 NAVIGATION OBJECTS ................................................................................................................... 139 Hotspots Graphic ...................................................................................................................... 140 Popup Index............................................................................................................................... 142 Automatic Menu ........................................................................................................................ 143 Kiosk Page Turner .................................................................................................................... 144 Glossary 1, 2, 3, 4 ..................................................................................................................... 145 Jump To URL 1, 2 ..................................................................................................................... 146 Navigation with Display............................................................................................................ 147 Get ToolBook Neuron 1, 2......................................................................................................... 148 Get Flash ................................................................................................................................... 149 Get Media Player ...................................................................................................................... 150 Get RealPlayer .......................................................................................................................... 151 Get PowerPoint ......................................................................................................................... 152 First/Last/Next/Previous Page, Back ........................................................................................ 153 Navigation Panel 1 - 43 ............................................................................................................ 154 PAGES ............................................................................................................................................ 155 All Pages ................................................................................................................................... 156 PLACEHOLDER OBJECTS ................................................................................................................. 157 Animated GIF............................................................................................................................ 158 Auto-Update Web Graphic........................................................................................................ 159 Auto-Update Web Field............................................................................................................. 160 External URL Graphic .............................................................................................................. 161 File ............................................................................................................................................ 162 Java ........................................................................................................................................... 163 Neuron....................................................................................................................................... 164 PowerPoint 95........................................................................................................................... 166 PowerPoint 97+ ........................................................................................................................ 167 Reusable Graphic...................................................................................................................... 168
ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 3
Web Graphic ............................................................................................................................. 170 Web Page................................................................................................................................... 171 QUESTIONS (MULTIPLE CHOICE).................................................................................................... 173 Multiple Choice 1 - 66............................................................................................................... 174 Definable Multiple..................................................................................................................... 184 Multiple Choice ......................................................................................................................... 193 Multiple Choice Fields .............................................................................................................. 203 QUESTIONS (TRUE-FALSE) ............................................................................................................. 215 True-False 1 - 52....................................................................................................................... 216 QUESTIONS (VARIOUS)................................................................................................................... 225 Definable Arrange 1, 2.............................................................................................................. 226 Definable Drop.......................................................................................................................... 236 Definable Match........................................................................................................................ 246 Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4................................................................................................................ 255 Drag Text................................................................................................................................... 264 Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4................................................................................................................ 271 Fill In The Blank 1, 2 ................................................................................................................ 281 Fill In The Blank Hotword ........................................................................................................ 291 Match Item 1.............................................................................................................................. 301 Match Item 2.............................................................................................................................. 310 Order Text ................................................................................................................................. 319 Rating 1, 2, 3 ............................................................................................................................. 326 Select Text ................................................................................................................................. 336 Slider 1, 2, 3, 4 .......................................................................................................................... 345 Slider Position ........................................................................................................................... 354 SCORING AND TRACKING ............................................................................................................... 355 Show Delayed............................................................................................................................ 356 Reset Lesson .............................................................................................................................. 359 Reset Page ................................................................................................................................. 360 Restart Lesson ........................................................................................................................... 361 Score This Quiz ......................................................................................................................... 362 Score This Page......................................................................................................................... 364 Show Score ................................................................................................................................ 366 Exit (Mark As Complete)........................................................................................................... 368 Exit (Suspend Lesson) ............................................................................................................... 369 Exit (Discard Results) ............................................................................................................... 370 Feedback Field.......................................................................................................................... 371 Score Field ................................................................................................................................ 372 Graphic Timer 1, 2, 3, 4 ............................................................................................................ 373 Digital Timer 1, 2 ...................................................................................................................... 375 TEXT FIELDS .................................................................................................................................. 377 Auto-Sizing Field....................................................................................................................... 378 Borderless.................................................................................................................................. 379 Call-out Bubble ......................................................................................................................... 380 Call-out Text.............................................................................................................................. 382 Card........................................................................................................................................... 383 Combo Box ................................................................................................................................ 384 Date Field.................................................................................................................................. 386 Display Page Number ............................................................................................................... 387
4
Graphic List............................................................................................................................... 388 Inset ........................................................................................................................................... 390 Marquee .................................................................................................................................... 391 Multi-Select List Box ................................................................................................................. 392 Ordered List .............................................................................................................................. 394 Password ................................................................................................................................... 395 Raised ........................................................................................................................................ 396 Rectangle................................................................................................................................... 397 Scrolling .................................................................................................................................... 398 Shadow Text 1, 2 ....................................................................................................................... 399 Shadowed .................................................................................................................................. 400 Single-Select List Box................................................................................................................ 401 Time Field ................................................................................................................................. 402 Unordered List .......................................................................................................................... 403
INTRODUCTION My Background
My name is Denny Dedmore and I work for Click2learn. My company involvement with ToolBook can be summarized as follows. In May of 1996 I was hired by Click2learn (then known as Asymetrix) as a Technical Support representative. I had never used ToolBook before that time. I spent the next three years answering phone calls and emails about ToolBook (as well as Librarian, Web 3D, 3D F/X, Compel, Digital Video Producer and Web Publisher). In June of 1999 I became the Manager of Technical Support, and worked in that capacity for the next year. In June of 2000 I was offered a position in the Engineering department working as an OpenScript programmer on ToolBook 8 and 8.5. In June of 2002 I transferred back over to Technical Support. I have attended all of the Platte Canyon TBCON conferences, offering presentations on a variety of topics.
My involvement with ToolBook also extends outside of the Click2learn company arena. I have been active on the ToolBook Listserv for the last five years. In 1997 I started up my own web site called www.toolbookthings.com. Using ToolBook 5 (and later 6.5) as my HTML editor of choice I created a place where users like yourselves could go to learn cool tips and tricks, download free snippets of OpenScript code and troubleshoot why your HTML export was not working. Although my site is no longer around, its three years of existence served the purpose of forcing me to use ToolBook as an HTML authoring tool. It also allowed me to use the site to show you all the pitfalls I ran into and how I got around them. When I closed the site down, I transferred all of the useful tips and snippets of code into the Technical Support knowledgebase where you can still access them today. In March of 1998 I started working on a replacement for the Full Text Search feature that was removed from version 6 of ToolBook. It took many months to complete, and in the end I created FTS Pro, an add-on utility for ToolBook. Platte Canyon is now the exclusive reseller of FTS Pro. If you have not heard of Platte Canyon you have no idea what you are missing. They make a variety of plug-ins for ToolBook visit them at www.plattecanyon.com. In June of 2002, I introduced a new web site called www.toolbookhelp.com. It is a place where I can sell my books as well as provide a resource of free information about ToolBook to the ToolBook user community.
VARIOUS THOUGHTS
Since I have written this book, that means I must be a writer in addition to a programmer, correct? Not at all. I find that I can write in a way that people can easily understand, but in the process Im sure I end up breaking every grammar rule ever written. I will do my best to ensure that there are no misspelled words and that the material makes sense, but I must write the way I write.
Target Audience
This book is intended for any ToolBook Assistant or ToolBook Instructor 8.5 users. It does not matter if you are a novice or have been using ToolBook for years, there is something in this book for everyone. If you are using ToolBook 8.0 or 8.1, much of this information also applies to you, however the book is written with 8.5 in mind.
Syntax Error
The material that I present in this book is true and correct to the best of my knowledge but as no programmer or user of ToolBook can know everything [even if we tend to all claim that we do], it is possible that I may improperly or incompletely represent some information. I invite you to contact me directly if you feel that I have done this.
Technical Support
Since this book is written by me and not Click2learn, all material presented in this book are my thoughts and all coding samples provided in this book are my samples. Please do not contact Click2learn Technical Support with questions about this book. They are not in any way responsible for the content. If you have questions about the content of this book please direct them to me.
Other Books
I have various ideas for ToolBook topics which could be written about. Writing one large book to encompass all of these ideas would take a considerable amount of time, and probably be more information than most of you want to read. Therefore I have considered making smaller books that focus on specific topics. If you have ideas for one of these focus books, please let me know. At this time the only other book I have in print is the OpenScript & Actions Editor Programming Reference Guide, available for order on my web site: http://www.toolbookhelp.com.
Anyone that has used ToolBook before, even just once, will likely know what the Catalog is. It is the place where you find all of the interactive objects that you can add to your project...things like question objects and media players. In fact there are several hundred objects in the catalog for you to use. For ToolBook Assistant users, using the Catalog is pretty much the only way to get objects into your project. ToolBook Instructor users have the option of also using the Tool Palette to draw certain objects onto their pages. Objects such as buttons and fields.
10
Catalog Basics
11
When the Catalog is in a Floating position, you can control the height and width simply by click-dragging any of the edges of the catalog window. The catalog will always snap to the nearest best-fit size.
Categories
If all the objects in the catalog were just tossed in one general area, it would be very difficult to locate the catalog object you need. For this reason the catalog is broken up into various categories. The catalog will only show you what is in one category at a time. To see what objects are in a different category, all you need to do is click on the category name and that category will slide open. If you check what is in the My Objects category you will find that it is empty be default. This is a category for you to put your own objects into.
ToolTips
When you hover your mouse over a category name a tooltip will be displayed to tell you what the purpose of the category is.
12
Catalog Basics
Showing/Hiding Categories
When you open ToolBook for the first time, you will notice that 13 categories are available. This however is not all of the categories that you have access to. The rest are hidden so as to not clutter up your precious screen space. You have the ability to hide or show any category, allowing you to customize it to the way you like.
To show or hide a category you will need to access the Customize Catalog dialog. To do this all you need to do is: 1. 2. Right-click on the caption bar of the catalog (or any category name) to reveal the right-click menu Click on the option to Customize
13
The Customize Catalog dialog shows a list of Categories and only those with a checkmark next to the Category Name will appear in the catalog. If you scroll though this list and check everything, your catalog may become a bit crowded but you will have access to all catalog objects. You will find that there are many Media categories that are hidden by default, as well as a Pages category which contains lots of page templates.
Catalog Objects
Each catalog category contains a number of catalog objects. These objects can be as simple as a standard field or button, or as complex as a fully functional Question object.
ToolTips
When you hover your mouse over a catalog object, a tooltip will be displayed to tell you what the purpose of the object is.
14
Catalog Basics
Showing/Hiding Objects
Certain objects in the catalog are only intended to be used for DHTML deployment, and others are intended for Native ToolBook (which includes Neuron) deployment, and still others are intended to be used in either mode. The catalog will automatically show the objects in the catalog that are appropriate for the deployment mode your book is configured for, as well as hide the objects which are not appropriate. You can see how an object in the catalog is configured by doing the following: 1. 2. Right-clicking the catalog object to reveal the right-click menu Choose the Properties for Icon option.
It is not at all recommended that you modify this setting for the standard catalog objects. You can however configure this setting for your own objects when you add them to the catalog.
15
16
Catalog Basics
The order that the catalog objects are defined in the sections that follow is based on the order that they appear in the ToolBook catalog. Often times you will find the objects are listed in a alphabetical order and in other categories this is not so. Below you will see every category of the catalog that ships with ToolBook, all showing at once, including some extra categories that are available from my web site for free. Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install the free categories.
17
18
Catalog Basics
Need some bullets for your project? Can't find anything decent to use? Then use my Bullets catalog category. It contains 114 bullet objects that you can drop into your application. They are available in a variety of colors, sizes and shapes. Using Web 3D 2.0 (a product Click2learn used to make years ago) I created these new images in early October of 2002. In order to use these new bullets, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it on your page. This works for both Assistant and Instructor. Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.
19
LIBRARY.TBK
For those of you that have used ToolBook forever, you may recall that versions of ToolBook way back when, such as 5.0, had a LIBRARY.TBK which contained lots of sample scripts and cool widgets not found elsewhere in the product. Somewhere along the way, I think starting in version 6, this accessory file stopped shipping with ToolBook. After several folks asking to see it revived, I decided to go through this Library file and see what could be moved into a Catalog category. You will find the result of that work below as a new category that you can add to your ToolBook 8.x authoring system. Note that most of the stuff in the old LIBRARY.TBK was sample code rather that widget objects. I only ported over those which were widgets. All of these objects work in Native ToolBook only, and will not function in DHTML. Because of this the category will appear EMPTY if your book is currently configured for DHTML. To use this new category, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it onto your page. This works for both Assistant and Instructor, although most of the objects in this category will be useful only if you have Instructor. Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.
20
Progress Bars
Ever wished you had a progress bar to use in your ToolBook project? Something to show the user while you grind through the processing of some data. An hour glass is normally useful for short delays but a longer delay is better served by using a progress bar. I created this Progress Bar Widget several years back and even made a small enhancement recently in preparation for putting it on my web site for all of you to use. It is driven entirely by OpenScript so you will not be able to get this working in a DHTML exported project. The download for this widget includes a sample book explaining what it is and how to use it, along with a .WBK file that you can import as a new Progress Bar category in your Catalog. In order to use these new Progress Bars, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this new category into your catalog. Since operating the Progress Bar will require the use of OpenScript, Assistant users will not be able to utilize this new widget. Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.
21
Question Images
Need a Multiple Choice (MC) or True/False (TF) question, but just can't bare to use the same old ones from the catalog? Tired of the Purple Question Marks, the Blue Question Marks, the lack of color choices? Using Web 3D 2.0 (a product Click2learn used to make years ago) I created about 100 new images for use with Question Objects. With the ability of ToolBook 8.x to import catalog categories, I decided to create a new category named Question Images which will contain all the normal question images plus a bunch more that I created. All you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it onto any TF or MC question object. This works for both Assistant and Instructor. NOTE: These new images look great on any light colored background but will produce a halo effect if you use it on a darker background. There is no way to get around that problem, as the images were created to feather the outer most pixels to white in order to produce a very crisp and clear image. Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.
22
Scrapbook
For those of you that have used ToolBook forever, you may recall that versions of ToolBook such as 5.0 had a Scrapbook of images that shipped with ToolBook. It even had its own little catalog-like utility to let you pick an image out of the scrapbook to add to your project. Well, I have resurrected it....sort of. Actually, I have taken all of the images out of the old scrapbook and created a Catalog category for you to add to your own catalog. These images are not bitmaps but are actually created using ToolBook draw objects (such as lines, rectangles, polygons). They will export to DHTML just fine and are fully resizable in ToolBook. To use this new category, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it onto your page. This works for both Assistant and Instructor. Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.
23
24
ACTION OBJECTS
DHTML Mode View:
Catalog Category
This category contains a variety of objects used for different purposes. The highlights would include the Simulation object (available only in Instructor), and the Action Trigger/Reset objects which will be very valuable to Assistant users.
25
Simulation
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE Using ToolBook, creating simulations of software is greatly simplified. Build the framework for an entire simulation in a single location, the Properties for Simulation dialog box. You can define steps in a simulation which include user interaction as trigger events. Respond to user input with different levels of feedback for each step. Add built-in behavior or define custom behavior if you prefer. Deliver your simulation in practice mode, assessment mode, or demonstration mode.
Note
Defining the complete functionality of the Simulation object could take up an entire book in itself, therefore I will not attempt to fully describe this object - it is simply beyond the scope of this book. If you are looking for a book which will more thoroughly cover the Simulation object, there is only one available. Tom Hall sells a book on his web site covering the Actions Editor and Simulation object. You can find that book at http://www.tcc-pub.com.
Purpose
For those of you who have never used the Simulation object, let me quickly summarize what it does and does NOT do, without trying to sound too confusing. It is NOT a screen capture utility to "watch" what you do in another application so that you can then have the end-user interact with that captured session. This object is essentially a very intelligent Question Object. Yes, it is a question object complete with Scoring functionality. In reality it deserves a category in the catalog by itself since it is such a complex component, but it is tossed in with the Action Objects instead. The SIM object will permit you to build a simulation of another program (if you wish) where you can take screen captures (which you capture and paste into ToolBook) and overlay onto those screen captures various ToolBook objects which the user can interact with - such as and editable field, combobox, checkbox, etc. The SIM object will permit you to configure a series of actions the end-user is tasked to do, referred to as Steps. The SIM object will permit the execution of your own custom Actions Editor code at key points in the simulations operation so that you can enhance the simulation experience. The SIM has a Demonstration mode which will let the user watch as the SIM accomplishes the Steps all by itself, which is useful for a training mode. The SIM has a Practice mode where the user is told what needs to be done and the SIM analyzes what the user did. It also provides feedback to the user about their success or failure at completing the tasks. The SIM has an Assessment mode where the user is in an actual testing mode, where they are given only one chance to complete each task.
Details
This is the SIM object. Seems pretty harmless for the moment.
Rather than trying to explain what all the individual Tabs and Checkboxes are, in the Extended Properties dialog for the SIM, let me walk you through the complete construction of a simulation I created. By doing this you will see all the critical areas of the SIM configuration editor as well as experience the process of putting one together. My sample will not cover all aspects of the SIM but will give you a general overall view of what it is and what you can expect it to be able to do for you.
26
Simulation
Example
My simulation is about how to use the SUM function, as well as how to BOLD text in a cell - using Microsoft Excel. This is not a very complex simulation - I wanted to keep it simple for your first walk through. This simulation consists of 3 separate tasks for the user to complete. The user will be provided feedback when they answer incorrectly, and will be automatically taken to the next task if they answer correctly. Below, you will see a screen capture of the finished ToolBook application. You will see that I have a Text Field across the top of the screen, a screen capture from Excel on the page, as well as a sort of "feedback" section off to the right.
Components
Although the Example screen shot above does not look too intimidating, it is actually made up of objects you are not even aware of. Seen below, I have spread all the objects out so that you can see each one of them, allowing you to clearly see how many objects there are in this simulation. As you can see, there were many things on the page that might not have been apparent: 4 Screen Shots A Next button as well as a Continue button The SIM object from the catalog Various fields which we will cover in detail Two shadow rectangles and 3 small rectangles which we will cover in detail.
27
Simulation
Assembly Step 1
The first thing I did to start my simulation creation was to build my basic components. Below you will see each component as well as Bubble Boxes explaining each element.
Assembly Step 2
The next step required acquiring actual screen shots from Excel. These are the 4 that I grabbed: The first one shows the initial state of the simulation.
The next one shows what the screen looks like after the SUM button is pressed.
28
Simulation
The third one shows the user successfully moving the focus rectangle to cell D2.
What the SIM is going to do, is permit me to show and hide these 4 images to make the user think they are interacting with the spreadsheet. These 4 images are pasted into ToolBook and stacked directly on top of each other, and the moved to an appropriate spot on the ToolBook page.
Assembly Step 3
Lastly I added the Title text across the top of the page with a text field, and added a shadow effect under the screen shots using a rectangle object. I also moved the SIM object somewhere out of the way.
29
Simulation
Assembly Step 4
One last thing needs to be added before we can start configuring the SIM. The user is expected to click on 3 things during this SIM. The SUM Toolbar button, the D2 cell and the Bold Toolbar button. In order for me to detect a click we need something to click on. That's were the 3 little rectangles come from which I revealed in the Components section. In my example the rectangles are visible (yellow actually), so that you can see them in this book, however you will not want the user to see them, so the rectangles should really be white and transparent with no border. These need to be sized and positioned directly over the areas on the screen shots that need to be clicked on. As you can see in this next image, I have put the little rectangles over the correct areas of the screen shots.
30
Simulation
CONTROL OBJECTS TAB Remember I had named all of the objects and I had indicated that I had already named my Feedback field, my Instructions field and Continue button? If you too do this, then the first time you open the SIM editor and go to this tab, the SIM will auto detect these objects and fill in the names for you. If you don't name your objects, you will not see them listed here nor can you choose them until you do name them. For the purposes of my simulation, I also chose to ensure that the Continue button was disabled as needed.
ACTIONS TAB The Actions Tab permits you to set up some Actions Editor logic which will execute at 3 possible times. In my case I needed to set up some Actions Editor code to hide various objects on the page when the Simulation was reset. I also wanted to ensure the NEXT button was made visible when the SIM was completed, so the user could leave the page. I also wanted the Instructions field to tell the user to click this NEXT button to get off the page.
Action Sequence: This is the Actions Editor logic I added to control what happens when the Simulation had ended.
31
Simulation
Action Sequence: This is the Actions Editor logic I added to control what happens when the Simulation is reset. This logic was needed to ensure the screen shots were hidden (except the initial one) and that the Next button was hidden.
STEPS TAB A SIM can have one or more STEPs configured within it. A STEP can be as simple as clicking on something, which is what I have configured - or it can be as complex as requiring the user to type several things on the page, and select various checkbox options. As you can see to the left, my 3 steps are listed. In order to create a step you just click Add... I will cover one of the steps below, but realize that all of the others are configured nearly identical.
STEP 1 - General Tab I have named my Step with something meaningful so I can differentiate it from the others I will be creating. I provided the instructions to the user to let them know what is expected of them for this first step. I also have configured this so they get two chances to get it correct.
32
Simulation
STEP 1 - Trigger Events Using the Add... button I have added a Correct trigger event. This event tells the SIM that it can proceed to the next Step. This correct trigger event is the act of clicking on the little rectangle I placed over the top of the SUM button on the Excel Toolbar. I also wanted to let the user know when they clicked on the wrong object. The easiest way to set that up was to use the option "Click on any object".
STEP 1 - Feedback Since this STEP is configured to a allow 2 attempts I can choose to configure the feedback text for an incorrect response. I can configure what the user sees the first time and the second time they get it incorrect. The user will see no feedback if they get the answer correct. For the Attempt 2, my feedback was configured to say " Sorry, you are still incorrect, the Simulation will now continue to the next task."
33
Simulation
STEP 1 - Actions On the Actions Tab for this Step, I wanted to ensure that when the Step was over that the next screen shot and clickable little rectangle, were shown so the user could see them. Note, because of the layer order that I put the screen shots in, I didn't need to worry about hiding the first screen shot. The second one ends up showing right on top of it.
Action Sequence: At the end of the Step, this Actions Editor code will ensure the next screen shot is visible.
34
Simulation
35
Action Trigger
DHTML or NATIVE An action trigger initiates an event, such as making a hidden object visible when you click the action trigger button at Reader level. You can use the action trigger to hide, show, animate, or trigger any object on your page.
The Action Trigger object is typically used by a ToolBook Assistant user who is interested in setting up a series of actions to occur on a page. ToolBook Instructor users can also use this object but will likely find that using the Actions Editor is much more powerful and just as easy [if not easier] to set up.
Purpose
The purpose of the object is to permit you to set up a series of actions to occur - in sequence. The type of actions you can perform is very limited, but you can do quite a bit with it. This object will permit you to do these four types of actions: Show an object Makes the object become visible Hide and object Makes the object become invisible Start a Path Animation Initiates the start of a predefined Path Animation you have configured for an object Trigger an Object Sends a ButtonClick to the object unless the object has a predefined behavior associated with the Trigger event. Various catalog objects will respond to the Trigger event. For example a Media Player such as the Universal Media Player will start playing if you Trigger it. A Delay button will start counting. Another Action Trigger can be 'triggered' allowing you to chain together several separately configured action sequences.
As seen in the figure below, I have set up the following sequence to occur when the page is entered: Show a button, Trigger a delay, Hide a button and Start a Path Animation.
Details
There is no preset limit to how many of these objects you can add to this list of Objects to Trigger. However if you add too many it becomes a small nightmare to manage. Notice that you have Up/Down arrows which will let you move an object to another position in the list of object, in the event you change your mind about the order things should be processed. You can click on the colored lettered block symbol in front of each object in your list to cycle through the four available action types. For example, if I changed my mind and wanted to show Button "Pencil" rather than hide it, all I need to do is click on the H symbol several times until it changes to a S symbol.
36
Action Trigger
To add items to this list, click the Add... button. This will open the following dialog:
When you click on the combobox it will expand to show you all named object on your page or background. I say 'named' because if you have not given your object a name, it will not show up in this list. So, make sure you name any object you are going to be referencing with the Action Trigger object, and make sure you give your objects different names. Naming them all XYZ may seem quick and easy but how can you tell the difference between them if you have 6 buttons named XYZ? You can't - and neither can ToolBook.
37
Reset Trigger
DHTML or NATIVE A reset trigger causes an object to return to its initial state. For example, if clicking an action trigger button hides a text field, you can use a reset trigger button to show the hidden field.
The Reset Trigger object is typically used by a ToolBook Assistant user who is interested in setting up a series of actions to occur on a page. ToolBook Instructor users can also use this object but will likely find that using the Actions Editor is much more powerful and just as easy [if not easier] to set up.
Purpose
The purpose of the object is to permit you to set up a series of actions to occur - in sequence, with the idea of resetting some objects back to an initial state. The type of actions you can perform is very limited, but you can do quite a bit with it. This object will permit you to do these four types of actions: Show an object Makes the object become visible Hide and object Makes the object become invisible Reset a Path Animation Stops a Path Animation and returns object to its start position. As of Version 8.5 this is the only way to reset a Path Animation. Even the Actions Editor is not able to reset a Path Animation. Trigger an Object Sends a reset [ASYM_Reset] message to the object. Various catalog objects will respond to the reset message. For example a Path Animation will reset, a Universal Media Player will stop and rewind, a question object will reset to an unanswered state.
As seen in the figure below, I have set up the following sequence to occur when leaving the page or when switching from Author to Reader level: Show a button, Hide a Button, Reset a Path Animation, Trigger a reset of a Universal Media Player.
Details
There is no preset limit to how many of these objects you can add to this list of Objects to Reset. However if you add too many it becomes a small nightmare to manage. Notice that you have Up/Down arrows which will let you move an object to another position in the list of object, in the event you change your mind about the order things should be processed. You can click on the colored lettered block symbol in front of each object in your list to cycle through the four available action types. For example, if I changed my mind and wanted to show Button "Pencil" rather than hide it, all I need to do is click on the H symbol several times until it changes to a S symbol.
38
Reset Trigger
To add items to this list, click the Add... button. This will open the following dialog:
When you click on the combobox it will expand to show you all named object on your page or background. I say 'named' because if you have not given your object a name, it will not show up in this list. So, make sure you name any object you are going to be referencing with the Reset Trigger object, and make sure you give your objects different names. Naming them all XYZ may seem quick and easy but how can you tell the difference between them if you have 6 buttons named XYZ? You can't - and neither can ToolBook.
39
Delay
DHTML or NATIVE A delay object adds a pause between two actions. For example, clicking an action trigger could hide an object like a triangle, pause 3 seconds and then show the triangle. This sequence of actions is set up in the Properties dialog box for an action trigger or reset trigger.
Purpose
The Delay catalog object is intended to be used in conjunction with the Action Trigger or Reset Trigger but can also be used with the Actions Editor too - although not recommended. A delay in the Actions Editor can be better accomplished using the Timed Delay action, rather than the Delay catalog object.
Details
The Delay catalog object can be configure to be from 0 to 65 seconds and although the editor does not indicate so, you can also use non-whole number values such as 4.5 seconds, however you are limited to one decimal place. To enter a value less than 1, type in your value in this format: 0.x
It is a good idea to rename your Delay object to something more meaningful such as "My 3 Second Delay" so that you can differentiate it from other Delay objects you may decide to put on the page. To use this object in conjunction with the Action or Reset Trigger, all you need to do is add the Delay object as one of the "Objects To Trigger" in the editor for the Action or Reset Trigger. Make sure the type of action you specify for this Delay object is 'trigger' - designated as a blue-T symbol as shown below.
Native | DHTML
This object behaves a little different in Native ToolBook as compared to when exported for DHTML. While this delay is occurring in Native ToolBook, most interactive events you may have added to your page will be blocked [this is not true for DHTML exported content]. For example any ToolTips or Rollover Graphic effects will not show until after the delay has finished. Only the following 3 things can occur during the delay in Native ToolBook: 1. 2. 3. A button click on a button will terminate the delay and permit ToolBook to process the button click. A button click on a hotword will terminate the delay and permit ToolBook to process the button click. Pressing Escape on your keyboard will terminate the delay.
40
Action Timer
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE The Action Timer is a timer that can play, pause, stop, and fire timing events at intervals or specified times. In the Actions Editor you can create behavior for the Action Timer that will respond to the On media timing and On media complete events.
This ToolBook Instructor-Only catalog object provides the means to implement a Timer without using OpenScript. OpenScript has a standard timerStart() function but since OpenScript will not export to DHTML this Action Timer object was introduced for use in DHTML - although it works fine in Native ToolBook too.
Purpose
Essentially a timer is used to measure a lapse in time. What actions you perform once that time has elapsed is up to you and you will need to program those actions using the Actions Editor in Instructor. For example here are a few reasons you might want to use an Action Timer: You want to limit the amount of time a user spends on a single page in your book. You want to set up a series of actions to occur, similar to what you might configure with an Action Trigger, but your needs are more complex. You want to flash an object on and off, perhaps an image of a warning light, until the user responds and clicks on an abort button. To slide an object across the screen in a specified amount of time - without using Path Animation.
Type Of Timer
When using this Action Timer object, there are essentially two ways to configure the timer.
Countdown timer This is likely to be what you most often use. Think of this as being similar to an oven timer. You set the timer for 1 minute [60000 milliseconds] and it will slowly count down and it will let you know when that time has passed by sending a MediaComplete event. Time Of Day timer This timer actually counts up rather than down. The starting value for counting up is not 0 however, it is actually just reporting the number of milliseconds which have elapsed since January 1, 1970. This is useful for determining how much time has passed. A MediaComplete event is never sent for this type of timer, since there is no means to specify when the timer should end.
41
Action Timer
Auto Start This determines if the timer will automatically start when you enter the page. If you want to start the timer at some other point, you will need to manually start it by using the Play action in the Actions Editor. Why Play? This object works pretty much by pretending that it is a media player. Fire Events If checked, sends time marker events at the intervals specified on the Time Markers tab and sends a MediaComplete event when the timer has finished.
Time Markers
Going back to my example of thinking of the Action Timer as an Oven Timer, Time Markers are best explained in much the same way. If you set your oven timer for 4 hours to cook a turkey, you obviously want to the timer to notify you at the end of that 4 hour period but you also may want to know when there is 1 hour left - so you can baste the turkey, 30 minutes left - so you can perhaps remove the tin foil covering the top of the turkey and 15 minutes left - so you can extract much of the expelled juices for making a gravy. Now, even my fancy oven timer is not able to do this - perhaps the ovens of the future will. But ToolBook can, and that is exactly what the Time Markers can be used for. Specific Times: As you can see below I have configured my 1 minute (60000 millisecond) timer to fire off Time Marker messages at 60000, 40000, 20000, and 5000 milliseconds. I didn't configure one for 0 because the MediaComplete message will be sent when the timer ends.
Periodic The Periodic type of Time Marker is for cases where you are not interested in knowing when a variable amount of time has elapsed, but rather you are only interested in knowing when a specific amount of time has passed. For example if I want a warning light graphic to appear to flash on and off at regular intervals I might configure a 500 millisecond (1/2 second) Periodic marker type.
42
Action Timer
MediaTimingEvent Event Message for Actions Editor - This event is sent to the Action Timer when a Time Marker position has been reached or when the Time Marker interval has elapsed when using the Periodic type. If the Fire Events option is not enabled, this event will not be sent. One single parameter is available for this event. The parameter is mediaPosition and represents the exact position of the Timer when the event was triggered. You can use this value to determine what specific action to take (hide or show objects for example).
MediaPosition Property of the Action Timer for the Actions Editor - Not to be confused with the mediaPosition parameter of the MediaTimingEvent - this MediaPosition property is a readable property of the timer. You can read this property at any time and it will report the position of the Timer.
43
Action Timer
MediaPlaying Property of the Action Timer for the Actions Editor - This property will have a value of TRUE if the Timer is currently going, but will return FALSE if it is stopped or paused.
44
Choose Browser
NATIVE ONLY The Choose Browser button allows the user to select the Web browser that will open when a URL is specified in the book.
Purpose
For a Native ToolBook application (or Neuron), anytime you perform a hyperlink to a web address ToolBook will need to open a Browser to show the web page in. What browser should ToolBook use? ToolBook could perhaps use the same logic your computer does, and use the Default browser configured for that machine, however ToolBook uses its own logic. ToolBook will use whatever browser is pre-configured to be the default browser for ToolBook. If there is no pre-configured browser when a hyperlink is attempted, ToolBook will prompt the user to make a choice, and then store that choice as the future default browser. The ability to modify which browser is the ToolBook default browser is controlled by using this Choose Browser button. It will scan the current computer and present a list of installed browsers to choose from, and then store that choice in the TB85R.INI file where the default setting is maintained.
45
Exit
DHTML or NATIVE Your ToolBook II application closes when the user clicks the Exit button at Reader level.
Purpose
This button behaves a bit different depending on how you deploy your content: If used in a Native ToolBook application, this Exit button will close the ToolBook window, exiting ToolBook. If you use this button in a DHTML application, it will close the browser window which contained the button. It will not, however, close the launcher window too - since it is a separate window. For a Neuron application, the ToolBook application will close but the browser window will remain open.
46
Purpose
This button behaves a bit different depending on how you deploy your content, however in all cases using this button will prompt the user if they really want to exit or not. If used in a Native ToolBook application, this Exit button will close the ToolBook window, exiting ToolBook. If you use this button in a DHTML application, it will close the browser window which contained the button. It will not, however, close the launcher window too - since it is a separate window. For a Neuron application, the ToolBook application will close but the browser window will remain open.
47
Run Application
NATIVE ONLY Use the Run button to start another program at Reader level. The program you specify must be installed on the users computer in order for the program to start when the user clicks the Run button.
The Run Application button sounds like a very useful button to have but in reality its usefulness is very limited.
Purpose
The purpose of the button is to allow you to point to an application on your development computer and when you click the button it will attempt to run that program.
Sounds great, but it will be very unlikely that your end-users will have the same application in the exact same path on their machine. In my example above, I have pointed to NOTEPAD.EXE in the Windows directory. This will work fine on another machine as long as the path to the application is c:\windows\notepad.exe. Unfortunately it is very common for the Windows directory be named WINNT on a Windows NT or 2000 machine, which would cause the path to be incorrect and fail on an end-user machine.
48
Open Document
DHTML or NATIVE Use the Open document button to display any type of file by starting another program at Reader level. The host program, such as Excel or Word, launches the file you specify based on the file's extension. The host program must be installed on the users computer in order for the program to run when the user clicks the Open document button.
Purpose
If you have some external files, such as some Acrobat (.pdf) files, maybe some Word (.doc) or Excel (.xls) file, and you want to ship them as part of your project and have ToolBook open them for you, this Open Document button is the easiest way to do it. The suggested way to use this is: Create a subdirectory in your project folder and call it perhaps EXTRAFILES. Put your various external files in this EXTRAFILES folder. Use one or more of the Open Document buttons to point to your files.
By keeping your external files contained in subdirectories of your project folder, it makes it easy and convenient to move your project elsewhere (to another machine, a zip disk, etc) and expect that ToolBook can still find those external files when it comes time to open them. Because the external files are inside of the project directory, anytime you move the project, the external files move too. If you export your project to DHTML, the export process will move a copy of the files into your Web Export folder so that it will work properly once you move your exported files to a Web Server and load it in your browser.
49
This catalog object works directly in conjunction with the Bullet Text objects.
Purpose
The Bullet Text objects have the ability to play a sound file as the bullet slides onto the screen, and this object controls if that sound file will be played or not. Think of it as a user configurable "sound off/on" switch.
50
Purpose
This functionality can be described as a fly-in bullet with an option to have sound accompany this effect. To make the bullet fly-in all you need to do is click on an empty portion of the screen. Click again, and the next bullet will fly in. This will continue until all the bullet text objects have slid onto the screen. The bullets will automatically slide back off of the edge of the screen when you switch to Reader level on that page. Also when you Export to DHTML they will properly stage themselves off the edge of the screen so that they are in the correct position when loaded in your browser.
Basics
If you add this object to your page, it will simply drop wherever you place it - but when you drop a second one on the page the two communicate with each other and coordinate the proper positioning of the bullets so that they appear equally spaced and aligned with each other. Continue to drop more and they continue to work with each other to maintain alignment. Take notice of the fact that there is a Level 1 and Level 2 style for each of the fly-in bullets. The Level 2 bullets have smaller bullet image as well as smaller text. Most notably, they are forced to a position that is slightly indented from a Level 1 bullet. NOTE The bullet alignment behavior cannot be turned off or disabled. This means it is not possible to have a grouping of bullets on the left edge of your page and another grouping of bullets on the right edge...they will instead all fall inline with each other.
51
Bullet Text
Fly-In Speed
Each bullet you add can slide in at a speed defined by the following Speed choices offered in the Property editor for the Bullet object: Fast Speed is relative, especially when different speed computers are used, but this is the fastest speed possible. Medium This speed is slower than Fast but faster than Slow. How's that for stating the obvious? Slow Still a decent speed, but the slowest speed possible. Static This setting prevents the bullet from sliding back off the edge of the screen when the page is reset - when switching from Author to Reader level for example. This bullet will not have a slide effect and will stay visible and positioned in its on-screen position at all times.
This will replace the image for all large Blue Oval bullet objects in the entire book.
52
Bullet Text
There is an optional separate object in the catalog named Play Audio With Bullets which you can place onto your page to allow the end-user to enable or disable the audio that is played by the fly-in bullets.
53
Bullet Text
54
Catalog Category
These objects provide Aspen functionality when your DHTML exported content is used in the Click2learn Aspen CDS or LXS product. They have no real purpose in a Native application, so if your book is configured for Native deployment, this category will not even appear in the catalog. DHTML Mode View:
55
Add A Link
DHTML ONLY Opens the add link dialog box in the Aspen Learning Experience Server.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
56
Add A Note
DHTML ONLY Opens the add note dialog box in the Aspen Learning Experience Server.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
57
Ask An Expert
DHTML ONLY Displays the Experts dialog box in the Learning Experience Server.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
58
Exit
DHTML ONLY Closes the course.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
59
Home
DHTML ONLY Navigates to the home page.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
60
View Glossary
DHTML ONLY Opens the glossary in the Learning Experience Server.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
61
View Help
DHTML ONLY Opens the Help file in the Learning Experience Server.
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
62
Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.
63
64
BUTTONS
Catalog Category
Buttons are often used to trigger events or set properties. All of the buttons in this category have no special behavior assigned to them. They are provided in the Catalog pretty much for the use of ToolBook Assistant users who have no ability to create a button in any other way. ToolBook Instructor users can draw buttons using the standard Tool Palette. Native Mode View: DHTML Mode View:
65
Pushbutton
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This is a standard button type with a beveled edge and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to invert for a moment, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
66
Command
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a slightly different bevel effect. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to learn about the general behavior of a button. There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Command Button does not exist on the Tool Palette. Having a Command Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project. It is possible to change an existing button to a Command Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Command Button in order to make it appear in ToolBook as a Command Button.
67
Shadow
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a Shadow effect rather than a bevel effect. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to learn about the general behavior of a button. There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Shadow Button does not exist on the Tool Palette. Having a Shadow Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project. It is possible to change an existing button to a Shadow Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Shadowed in order to make it appear in ToolBook as a Shadow Button.
68
Rounded
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a Rounded edge effect rather than a bevel effect. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to learn about the general behavior of a button. There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Rounded Button does not exist on the Tool Palette. Having a Rounded Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project. It is possible to change an existing button to a Rounded Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Rounded in order to make it appear in ToolBook as a Rounded Button.
69
Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a no bevel edge. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to learn about the general behavior of a button. There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Rectangle Button does not exist on the Tool Palette. Having a Rectangle Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project. It is possible to change an existing button to a Rectangle Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Rectangle in order to make it appear in ToolBook as a Rectangle Button.
70
Checkbox 3D
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This is a standard button type with a 3D looking Checkbox, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
71
Radio Button
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
NATIVE ONLY You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This is a standard button type with a flat [non-3D] looking Radio Button, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
72
Checkbox
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
NATIVE ONLY You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This is a standard button type with a flat [non-3D] looking Checkbox Button, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
73
Radio Button 3D
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This is a standard button type with a 3D looking Radio Button, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
74
Label
DHTML or NATIVE You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a caption or both.
This is a standard button type, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default a button has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
75
76
DRAW OBJECTS
Catalog Category
ToolBook comes with its own graphical object types to help you create basic objects such as a rectangle, or line. These objects are movable once drawn on the screen, allowing you to reposition them, resize them, reshape them, modify their colors, etc. They are provided in the Catalog pretty much for the use of ToolBook Assistant users who have no ability to create a draw object in any other way. ToolBook Instructor users can draw these using the standard Tool Palette. If you export your project to DHTML, draw objects are typically converted into GIF images. Internet Explorer however, knows how to directly draw these types of objects in the browser environment without the need to have the object rendered as a GIF image. To enable this feature, ensure the checkbox on the Web tab of the Property sheet for the specific object is checked. Netscape does not have this same ability, so even if you check this option, only Internet Explorer will benefit from it. Netscape will continue to use the exported GIF images.
77
Triangle
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Triangle draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 3 sides. Using ToolBook Instructor a triangle shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 3 sided polygon prior to actually drawing one. By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
78
Square
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Square draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 4 sides. Using ToolBook Instructor a square shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 4 sided polygon prior to actually drawing one. Note that whereas the Square catalog object is actually a 4 sided Polygon object, the Rectangle catalog object is an object type in and of itself. The only real difference is that you can edit the shape of a Polygon - to add or remove line segments if you like. However you cannot do this to a Rectangle object, as a rectangle must have 4 sides. By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
79
Pentagon
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Pentagon draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 5 sides. Using ToolBook Instructor a pentagon shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 5 sided polygon prior to actually drawing one. By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
80
Hexagon
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Hexagon draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 6 sides. Using ToolBook Instructor a hexagon shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 6 sided polygon prior to actually drawing one. By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
81
Octagon
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Octagon draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 8 sides. Using ToolBook Instructor an octagon shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 8 sided polygon prior to actually drawing one. By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
82
Freeform Polygon
DHTML or NATIVE You can draw a polygon of any shape with this tool. Click to add a vertex point when the pencil cursor is displayed. Double-click to finish your polygon. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Freeform Polygon draw object is not really an object but rather a process of allowing you to draw an Irregular Polygon object with any number of line segments you want. When you drag this object out of the catalog it turns into a pencil which you can use to place (by clicking) polygon nodes on the page. ToolBook Instructor users can draw one of these using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. The only difference in behavior is that no pencil is displayed as the drawing is occurring. Instead, only a cross-hair cursor is shown. By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
83
Circle
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape a circle or an ellipse by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the object. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Circle draw object is really just an Ellipse draw object in which the height and width are the same, making it appear as an exact circle rather than an oval, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default an Ellipse or Circle has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
84
Ellipse
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape a circle or an ellipse by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the object. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Ellipse draw object comes out of the catalog in a slightly oval shape, not perfectly circular in form, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. By default an Ellipse has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
85
Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape a rectangle by dragging its handles. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Rectangle draw object comes out of the catalog in a slightly non-square shape and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. Note that the Rectangle object is an object type in and of itself, whereas the Square catalog object is actually a 4 sided Polygon object. The only real difference is that you can edit the shape of a Polygon - to add or remove line segments if you like. However you cannot do this to a Rectangle object, as a rectangle must have 4 sides. By default a Rectangle has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
86
Rounded Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape a rounded rectangle by dragging its handles. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Rounded Rectangle draw object comes out of the catalog in a slightly non-square shape and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
87
The Freeform Angled Line is not really an object in and of itself, but is rather a process for creating an Angled Line with as many line segments as you wish. This can also be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. When drawing your own line with the Tool Palette you can draw as many segments as you like - double-clicking when you have placed your last node.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
88
Simple Curve
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape a curve by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the curve. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Simple Curve as well as the Complex Curve catalog objects are both really just Curve Draw Objects, where the Simple one has only one curve and the Complex one has two. ToolBook Instructor users can draw their own Curve objects by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right where you can add as many curves to your Curve object as you like.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
89
Arc
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape an arc by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the arc. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Arc Draw Object is an ellipse where you get to decide how much of the perimeter of the ellipse you want to see. By default an Arc will be added to your page as a segment of a ellipse, but you can adjust what portion of the arc is visible by selecting Reshape Arc from the Draw menu and adjusting the arc end points. ToolBook Instructor users can add an Arc to their page by using the Tool Palette as show to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
90
Pie
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and reshape a pie shape by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the pie shape. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.
The Pie Draw Object is an ellipse where you get to decide how much of the ellipse you want to see. By default a Pie will be added to your page as a segment of a ellipse, but you can adjust what portion of the pie is visible by selecting Reshape Pie from the Draw menu and adjusting the pie end points. ToolBook Instructor users can add a Pie to their page by using the Tool Palette as show to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
91
Line
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch or shrink a line object by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to a line.
The Line is a standard ToolBook Draw Object and can also be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
92
Angled Line
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Angled Line from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Angled Line is a 3 segment line and can also be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. When drawing your own line with the Tool Palette you can draw as many segments as you like - double-clicking when you have placed your last node.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
93
Complex Curve
DHTML or NATIVE You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.
The Complex Curve as well as the Simple Curve catalog objects are both really just Curve Draw Objects, where the Simple one has only one curve and the Complex one has two. ToolBook Instructor users can draw their own Curve objects by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right where you can add as many curves to your Curve object as you like.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the web.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.
94
MEDIA (ANIMATED)
Cell Animation
Catalog Category
This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists. All of the objects in the category are Cell Animations.
A Cell Animation is similar to a cartoon, where the animation is actually just a series of still images that are flipped in rapid succession. The Path Animation tool in ToolBook can make an object move across your screen, or it can be configured as a Cell Animation, or both. Native and DHTML Mode View:
95
Animated Helicopter
DHTML or NATIVE This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.
This Animated Helicopter catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 6 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play Media action:
Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor:
96
Animated Top
DHTML or NATIVE This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.
This Animated Top catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 5 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play Media action:
Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor:
97
Animated Globe
DHTML or NATIVE This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.
This Animated Globe catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 3 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play Media action:
Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor:
98
Animated Gears
DHTML or NATIVE This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.
This Animated Gears catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 9 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play Media action:
Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor:
99
Animated Clock
DHTML or NATIVE This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.
This Animated Clock catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 25 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play Media action:
Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor:
100
MEDIA (BACKDROPS)
Definition
Catalog Category
This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
A Backdrop is defined as a Bitmap Resource that is assigned to a background so that the image can be used for a background image. This image will be displayed behind all objects you put on the background or page. You can configure the image in a variety of layout styles as follows: None Center of background Stretch to fill Tile from upper left Tile from center Checkerboard style 1 Checkerboard style 2 Checkerboard style 3 Checkerboard style 4
DHTML Notes
The following three styles are not supported in DHTML: Tile from center (Tile from upper left is substituted) Checkerboard 3 (Checkerboard 1 is substituted) Checkerboard 4 (Checkerboard 2 is substituted)
101
All Backdrops
DHTML or NATIVE A backdrop appears on all pages that share a background. This graphic image can also be used as an individual graphic that will appear on the foreground of a single page.
All of the various styles of Backdrops found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they all behave identically. The only real differences between each of them are the size and color scheme.
General Usage
When you double-click on one of these Catalog objects (or drag one onto your page) you will be presented with the following dialog asking how you would like to apply this Catalog object to your book. You can choose Backdrop, or Bitmap on the Page. For this discussion we are talking about Backdrops so you will likely want to choose that. You will also be able to set the Style for the backdrop.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 43 different Backdrops in this category, which come in 3 ranges of size. Native and DHTML Mode View:
102
Catalog Category
This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
All of the objects in the Clip Art category are just Button objects with a Bitmap Resource applied as the NormalGraphic image. These images are not Picture Objects nor Paint Objects.
General Usage
There are 3 ways to add one of these images to your book. 1. When you drag one onto a blank area of your page you will be presented with the following dialog asking how you would like to apply this Catalog object to your book. By default it presumes you want to add the image to the page as a button with the selected bitmap image applied as the NormalGraphic image. Alternately you can choose to set the image as the current Backdrop if you like.
If you choose a Bitmap On The Page, you will end up with a Graphics Placeholder object on the page which incidentally is the same thing as a Reusable Graphic Placeholder. This Graphics Placeholder has some extended properties you can configure:
Although an Output Format option is presented, it does not work. It is actually a holdover from the days when ToolBook's web export did not create DHTML, but rather just plain HTML. ToolBook uses its own logic to
103
determine if your image will be exported as a GIF or JPG, based on a number of factors such as if the image has a Chromakey value assigned. 2. When you drag one onto an existing button object in your book, you will be presented with the following dialog asking which Graphic State you want the image applied to, as well as what kind of sizing behavior you wish to apply.
3.
When you drag one into a field, the image will be inserted into the text of the field as an in-line image. In this example I wanted to put a Thumb Tack in front of a line of text.
104
All of the various Clip Art images found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they all behave identically.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 179 different image in this category, which can be seen below. Native and DHTML Mode View:
105
106
MEDIA (ICONS)
Definition
Catalog Category
This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
All of the objects in the Icons category are just Button objects with a Icon Resource applied as the NormalGraphic image. These images are not Picture Objects nor Paint Objects.
General Usage
There are 3 ways to add one of these images to your book. 1. When you drag one onto a blank area of your page you will be end up with a button object. The icon image you see is an Icon Resource assigned as the Normal Graphic of the object. When you drag one onto an existing button object in your book you will be presented with the following dialog asking which Graphic State you want the image applied to, as well as what kind of sizing behavior you wish to apply.
2.
3.
When you drag one into a field, the image will be inserted into the text of the field as an in-line image. In this example I wanted to put a Check Mark in front of a line of text.
107
All Icons
DHTML or NATIVE Use to add graphical interest to your page.
All of the various Icon images found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they all behave identically.
General Usage
When you drag one onto a blank area of your page you will be end up with a button object. The icon image you see is an Icon Resource assigned as the Normal Graphic of the object.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 161 different image in this category, which can be seen below. Native and DHTML Mode View:
108
Catalog Category
This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
A Backdrop is defined as a Bitmap Resource that is assigned to a background so that the image can be used for a background image. This image will be displayed behind all objects you put on the background or page. You can configure the image in a variety of layout styles as follows: None Center of background Stretch to fill Tile from upper left Tile from center Checkerboard style 1 Checkerboard style 2 Checkerboard style 3 Checkerboard style 4
DHTML Notes
The following three styles are not supported in DHTML: Tile from center (Tile from upper left is substituted) Checkerboard 3 (Checkerboard 1 is substituted) Checkerboard 4 (Checkerboard 2 is substituted)
109
All Backdrops
DHTML or NATIVE A backdrop appears on all pages that share a background. This graphic image can also be used as an individual graphic that will appear on the foreground of a single page.
All of the various Backdrops found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they all behave identically. The only real differences between each of them are the size and color scheme.
General Usage
When you double-click on one of these Catalog objects (or drag one onto your page) you will be presented with the following dialog asking how you would like to apply this Catalog object to your book. You can choose Backdrop, or Bitmap on the Page. For this discussion we are talking about Backdrops so you will likely want to choose that. You will also be able to set the Style for the backdrop.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 40 different Backdrops in this category, as seen below. Native and DHTML Mode View:
110
MEDIA PLAYERS
Native Mode View:
Catalog Category
Objects you use to play and control audio and visual file-based media clips, including wave audio, digital video, and still images.
111
If you are interested in playing media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look at. It will play virtually any media file you can find.
Purpose
The purpose of the Universal Media Player (UMP) is to provide you with a single media player which will play almost any media file you need to play. In addition to this ability is also the ability to let the Actions Editor know when the media has finished (On Media Complete) or when certain positions have been reached within the media (On Media Timing Event).
Media History
Historically, ToolBook's media playback has been handled by the use of OpenScript and playing Clips. ToolBook's Clip System can play back AVI, WAV and MIDI files by default and can also play back more types such as MPG if you happen to get the right MCI Drivers installed on your machine. With the introduction of ActiveX Support in ToolBook 6, a whole new world of media types became accessible to ToolBook. For example, by implementing a Windows Media Player ActiveX Control within ToolBook you can play all these media types, simply because Microsoft has built this wide ranging support into the Windows Media Player: ASF, ASX, WM, WMA, WMV, WAX, MID, MIDI, RMI, WAV, AVI, MP3, MPA, M3U, MPG, MPEG, M1V, MP2, MOV, QT, AIF, AIFC, AIFF Most users have moved away from using the Clip System and are now using ActiveX to play back media. The Clip System does still exist in ToolBook and you are free to use it, although using it will require knowing OpenScript to setup and control the playback of the Clips you add to ToolBook.
Details
When you sift though all the details about what the Universal Media Player is and how it works, the bottom line is that the Universal Media Player is a wrapper object for the RealPlayer, Windows Media Player and Flash ActiveX control objects. When you configure a media file in the Universal Media Player, the underlying logic of the Universal Media Player will detected the file type you specified and dynamically create the appropriate ActiveX Control container objects inside of the Universal Media Player group object, permitting it to play your file. If you change your mind and choose a different file type, the Universal Media Player may very well destroy the previously created ActiveX Control container and draw a new one appropriate for playing your newly chosen file type. The initial look of the Universal Media Player when you add it to your page is an unconfigured look. As you configure the Universal Media Player and it gets associated with one of the ActiveX controls you will see its appearance change to one of the following:
REAL PLAYER
112
General Tab
Configuring the Universal Media Player to play a file starts with telling it where the media file is located at on your hard drive, as well as defining some basic behaviors. NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.
Player Name If you have multiple Universal Media Players on a single page, it will be a good idea to give each of your Universal Media Players a unique name. By default each Universal Media Player is named "Universal Media Player". Media Source This is the location of the media file configured to be played. Use the little folder icon at the edge of the entry field to choose a media file. If blank, and you know it was configured to point to a file, you have apparently moved your external media file and now the player cannot locate the file. If you put the file back, and reopen the editor, the file name will appear as you would expect. Auto Start This options determines whether or not the Universal Media Player will automatically start playing the media file when the page is entered. This removes the need for the user to have to initiate the play of the media. Display Video Region Depending on the file type you choose and the ActiveX control being used to play the selected file, you may be able to control whether the video playback region of the media player will be visible to the user. In some cases you will find that this checkbox is grayed out. In that case, you have no control over the video playback region. NOTE If the Windows Media Player will be the media player used by the Universal Media Player to play back your audio file, you can manually hide the video region by simply reducing the height of the player to the point where only the media controls are available.
Display Media Controls Depending on the file type you choose and the ActiveX control being used to play the selected file, you may be able to control whether the media playback controls of the media player will be visible to the user. In some cases you will find that this checkbox is grayed out. In that case, you have no control over the media playback controls.
Advanced Tab
This ToolBook Instructor-Only tab will permit you to change the ActiveX control ToolBook uses for playing back the various media types the Universal Media Player supports. The Universal Media Player has a built in cross reference table
ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 113
of media file types and the recommended player to play the file with. This gives ToolBook the ability to guess at the most likely ActiveX player to use, but gives you the ability to override it.
Use the following media player to play this media This combobox will list up to 3 media players: Windows Media Player, RealPlayer, and Flash. You are permitted to choose any media player listed in the Combobox to be the media player used for your specified media file. ToolBook keeps a running list of your preferences. So, although MP3 files are by default played with the Windows Media Player, if you change the combobox entry to RealPlayer then RealPlayer will be considered the default player in the future when you try to configure another MP3 file.
List only recognized media players for specified media file If checked, the Universal Media Player will not display a media player that it knows can't play your chosen media file. For example FLASH is unable to play an MPG file, so there is no need to offer FLASH as a choice in the above combobox. The checkbox was implemented for future consideration. For example, perhaps one day a new version of FLASH will be able to play an MPG file, and when it does you will need a way of forcing the Universal Media Player to allow this.
114
Enable Time Markers This turns On or Off the ability for your Universal Media Player to send On Media Timing Event messages when the configured time intervals have been reached. Periodic If you are not interested in when specific time positions have been reached in the media file you can alternately ask to be notified every X number of milliseconds. Specific Times If you want to take some sort of action - using the Actions Editor, at very specific times during the playback of the media file, select this option. Add Time Marker Using the media player which is built-in to the Time Markers tab, you can play your media file. Pressing the Add Time Marker button while the media is playing will insert the current Time Marker position into the list of configured time markers. Marker Time and Comment Lists the time markers configured as well as comments to help you remember why you added the marker. Right click on a comment or marker time to edit the values.
If you have configured Time Markers, the Universal Media Player will send an On Media Timing Event message to itself when each time marker position is reached. The mediaPosition parameter of the Media Timing Event will contain the timer marker value. Seen in the next figure, I have configured the Universal Media Player to handle two different time marker positions.
115
This object is also known as the Popup Universal Media Player. Unfortunately the catalog cannot display 28 character caption names so it was truncated down to Popup Media Player instead. If you are interested in playing media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look at. It will play virtually any media file you can find. Since 95% of the functionality is identical to the Universal Media Player, I will ask that you simply refer to the Universal Media Player information in this book to learn about how it works, and I will cover all of the differences below.
Purpose
The only difference between this Popup Universal Media Player and the Universal Media Player is that this one has the ability to keep itself hidden until you are ready to play the video.
Details
When you add this catalog object to your page, it comes in as two separate objects. One is a button with the caption of Popup Media Player. This is the object you want to select when accessing the Extended Properties, in order to configure it. The other is the Popup Media Frame. The frame is used to define the area of the screen to be used to play your media. You can move and resize the frame. Each Popup Universal Media Player comes with its own frame but if you have more than one Popup Universal Media Player on a page you can configure each of them to use the exact same frame to playback the media. Once reconfigured to all use the same frame, you are free to delete the other unneeded frames.
You will likely notice that after adding a Popup Universal Media Player to your book a new page is added to the end of your book. This is normal. The way the Popup Universal Media Player works it complex and this extra page is needed in order to make it work properly. It is import to not delete that added page, as doing do will break the functionality of the Popup Universal Media Player you added. If you attempt to delete it you will be warned with a message. If you look at the page a warning is tiled into the background graphic.
116
General Tab
Configuring the Popup Universal Media Player to play a file starts with telling it where the media file is located at on your hard drive, as well as defining some behaviors.
Media Frame If you have numerous Popup Universal Media Players on your page, you may want to share a single Frame between more than one Popup Universal Media Player. You can choose which frame to use by using this combobox. Since they will likely all be named Popup Media Frame, you may find it difficult to tell which one is which. For that reason the red target symbol has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target symbol onto any Frame object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the correct Frame reference. Auto Hide When Media Stops If you enable the option, when the media in the media player stops, the media will hide itself. Delay Hiding Media For: If you chose to hide the media when it stops, you can designate if you want a delay to occur before the media is hidden. Show In Separate Window If you enable this option, when the media is popped up (shown) it will be in its own window, complete with caption bar. It will be possible for the user to then move the playing media as well as close it using the X in the corner of the window. Hide Button At Reader If you turn on the Auto Start feature, you may want to ensure the Popup Media Player button is hidden at Reader Level so the user can't see it or use it.
117
If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look at.
Purpose
The Flash Media Player is actually just a standard Universal Media Player which has been reconfigured to assume you will be using it for Flash files. You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file types supported by the Universal Media Player. Please refer to the entry for Universal Media Player for details on how to use this object.
118
If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look at.
Purpose
The Popup Flash Player is actually just a standard Popup Media Player which has been preconfigured to assume you will be using it for Flash files. You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file types supported by the Popup Media Player. Please refer to the entry for Popup Media Player for details on how to use this object.
119
Correct Feedback
DHTML or NATIVE This Popup Flash Player is configured to display a media file appropriate for use as question feedback.
If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look at.
Purpose
The Correct Feedback media player is actually just a standard Popup Flash Player which has been preconfigured to assume it will be playing the Flash file typically located at the following location on your Authoring machine: Instructor Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Instructor85\Media\Flash\correct.swf
Assistant Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Assistant85\Media\Flash\correct.swf
You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file types supported by the Popup Media Player. Please refer to the entry for Popup Media Player for details on how to use this object.
Details
This catalog object was created so that you could use it as Feedback for a Question Object. As seen below you can have a question object play a Media Player as feedback to a question response.
120
Incorrect Feedback
DHTML or NATIVE This Popup Flash Player is configured to display a media file appropriate for use as question feedback.
If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look at.
Purpose
The Incorrect Feedback media player is actually just a standard Popup Flash Player which has been preconfigured to assume it will be playing the Flash file typically located at the following location on your Authoring machine: Instructor Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Instructor85\Media\Flash\incorrect.swf
Assistant Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Assistant85\Media\Flash\incorrect.swf
You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file types supported by the Popup Media Player. Please refer to the entry for Popup Media Player for details on how to use this object.
Details
This catalog object was created so that you could use it as Feedback for a Question Object. As seen below you can have a question object play a Media Player as feedback to a question response.
121
Streaming RealPlayer
NATIVE ONLY Use this player to include RealSystem G2 streaming media content in your book. To display your RealMedia file, users must have the RealSystem G2 Player installed on their computers. This player is available for free download from www.real.com. You can supply a link to the RealNetworks download page by dragging the Get RealPlayer button from the Navigation Objects category to your page.
Purpose
The purpose of the Streaming RealPlayer is to provide you with a media player which will play RealNetworks media types. This Streaming RealPlayer media player is considered to be outdated and is still around simply for backwards compatibility with older versions of ToolBook. As such, no details of its use will be provided in this documentation. If you are interested in playing Real files the recommended player is the Universal Media Player.
122
Streaming MPlayer
NATIVE ONLY This player is available for free download from the Microsoft Web site. You can supply a link to the Windows Media download page by dragging the Get Media Player button from the Navigation Objects category to your page.
Purpose
The purpose of the Streaming MPlayer is to provide you with a media player which will play Windows Media Player media types. This media player is considered to be outdated and is still around simply for backwards compatibility with older versions of ToolBook. As such, no details of its use will be provided in this documentation. If you are interested in playing Windows Media Player files the recommended player is the Universal Media Player.
123
Video Player 1, 2, 3
DHTML or NATIVE Use a video player to show a digital video. You can play a file with an .AVI extension; other video file formats will play if you have the appropriate driver or control installed (such as .MOV files). To learn more about digital video, see the online Help topic, "About digital video files." If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming media files.
Purpose
The purpose of the Video Player media players is to provide you with media players which will play AVI files. The playback mechanism for these 3 players utilizes the built-in media engine inside of ToolBook - the Clip System. This Clip System utilizes MCI standards and as such can only play media types for which MCI drivers are installed. These Video Player media players are considered to be somewhat outdated and limited in functionality. If you are interested in playing media files the recommended player is the Universal Media Player.
Details
The difference between the 3 Video Player media players is pretty much isolated to the look of the control bar at the bottom of the player. Each offers a different set of controls.
Video Player 1
Video Player 2
Video Player 3
General Tab
Configuring a Video Player media player starts with identify the file you wish to play.
Name By default each new Video Player that you add to your book will have a name of "Video Player". It is a good idea to rename this, giving it a unique name in the event you later need to programmatically refer to the object using OpenScript or perhaps the Actions Editor. Clip to play Since a Video Player media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox. Choose a Clip If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above.
124
Video Player 1, 2, 3
Play all of clip before continuing If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue. Play clip continuously in background If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page.
Options Tab
Stage Properties Opens the Stage Properties dialog. Pre-load Pre-loads the clip when the page is entered in Reader mode for faster startup on play. Auto-play Automatically plays the clip when the page is entered in Reader mode. Auto-show Automatically shows the first frame of the clip when the page is entered in Reader mode. Auto-close Automatically closes the clip when the page is exited in Reader mode. Update slider while media is playing Specifies that the slider moves to display the progress of a playing clip.
125
Purpose
The purpose of the Popup Video media players is to provide you with media players which will play AVI files. The playback mechanism for these 3 players utilizes the built-in media engine inside of ToolBook - the Clip System. This Clip System functions on MCI standards and as such can only play media types for which MCI drivers are installed. The key difference between the Popup Video media players and the Video Player media players is that this one has the ability to keep itself hidden until you are ready to play the video. These Popup Video media players are considered to be somewhat outdated and limited in functionality. If you are interested in playing popup media files the recommended player is the Popup Universal Media Player.
Details
When you add this catalog object to your page, it comes in as two separate objects. One is a button with the caption of Popup Video. This is the object you want to select when accessing the Extended Properties, in order to configure it. The other is the Popup Video Frame. The frame is used to define the area of the screen to be used to play your media. You can move and resize the frame. The different between Popup Video 1, 2 and 3 is simply the default size of the frame. Each page can contain only one Popup Video Frame, and all Popup Video media players you add to your page will utilize that same frame. If you delete the frame, the video will play in the upper left corner of the monitor.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying a series of settings using the Extended Properties dialog.
126
Name By default each new Video Player that you add to your book will have a name of "Popup Video (size)". It is a good idea to rename this, giving it a unique name in the event you later need to programmatically refer to the object using OpenScript or perhaps the Actions Editor. Clip To Play Since the Video Player media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox. Choose A Clip If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above. Choose A File Use this button to immediately import a file as a Clip. This is a quicker way than using the Choose A Clip option. Play All Of Clip Before Continuing If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue. Play Clip Continuously In Background If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page. Start Clip When Entering The Page If selected, the clip will start as soon as the user enters the page.
127
Video-Text Synchronizer
DHTML or NATIVE Use this object to display text that is highlighted when the associated frame in a video appears. If the user clicks on text in the synchronizer field when the video is not playing, the text will be highlighted and the video will begin playing at the associated frame.
Purpose
The Video Synchronizer object allows you to synchronize text with a playing video. (The video clip must be an .AVI file.) A section of text is highlighted when the associated frame in a video appears. You define a section of text by pressing CTRL+ENTER before each section in the synchronizer text field to insert a breakpoint and start a new line. Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER to enter a breakpoint without starting a new line. Each section break is marked by a special red symbol shown below between each paragraph.
Because the video clip must be an AVI, this object is not likely to be one you will want to use for DHTML export. Streaming media forms such as RM or WMV are the best formats to use when your project will be exported to DHTML and accessed from a Web Server. AVI files typically are not played from a Web Server because the entire AVI file will have to be downloaded from the server and placed in the user's Browser Cache before the clip will even start to play, and the amount of time needed to do this is normally considered to be unacceptable to your end users.
Details
When you add this Video-Text Synchronizer object to your page you will end up with just a field object. This field is the Video-Text Synchronizer and has Extended Properties you can access to configure it. Since this Video-Text Synchronizer is supposed to synchronize itself with a playing video file, a video player will also be needed. This Video-Text Synchronizer will function with the Video Player 1, 2 or 3 media player.
General Tab
Configuring the Video-Text Synchronizer starts with identify the Video Player you wish to play.
Name By default each new Video-Text Synchronizer that you add to your book will have a name of "Video
128
Video Synchronizer
Synchronizer". It is a good idea to rename this, giving it a unique name in the event you later need to programmatically refer to the object using OpenScript or perhaps the Actions Editor. Media Player Each Video-Text Synchronizer needs to be associated with a Video Player. This combobox will list all Video Players on the page, allowing you to choose one. Unfortunately the name of the video player is not displayed in the combobox, but rather the Group ID number is. This is not very convenient, but it is functional. Color This gives you control over which color is used to highlight the text in the field.
Options Tab
Configuring the Video-Text Synchronizer also requires identifying which frames of the video file correspond to the various sections of your text field.
Video Preview To make setting up the Video-Text Synchronizer as easy as possible, a functional Video Player is present in the Extended Properties. You can use the controls of the Video Preview Player to move throughout your video. When you find a frame in the video that you want associated with a specific section of text, press the button on the player and a new entry will appear in the sequence list located at the bottom of the Options Tab. Title When you first open the Extended Properties for the Video-Text Synchronizer, the Sequence List will already have one entry for each section that appears in your text field. The default Title is the first several words of the section text, but you are free to change the Title of any of these, or leave the default values in place. Frame The Frame is the frame number within the video file, which should be associated with the section text in the field. You are free to modify the frame number as long as the value you specify is not equal to or greater than the next section's frame number, and as long as the value is not equal to or less than the previous section's frame number. Sequence List The entire list of Titles and Frame numbers are shown in sequential order here. Clear Allows you to remove an entry from the Sequence List. First select the entry in the Sequence List and then press Clear. Jump To Frame Allows you to move the Video Preview Player's video file to the correct frame position for the currently selected Title. First select the entry in the Sequence List and then press Jump To Frame.
129
Purpose
The various Media Players in the Catalog generally provide standard controls needed in order to Play, Stop or Pause your media file, but sometimes you might find it useful to provide your own Play, Stop or Pause buttons, and not force the user to use the standard ones. For example, using the Universal Media Player you can choose to hide the media controls of an MPG file being played back. Using the Play Media Player button you can control the MPG file but also you are free to make the Play Media Player button look however you like and position it wherever you like on the screen.
Details
The only setting to configure with this catalog object is the media player to control.
Select The Media Player To Play The combobox will list all media players on the page allowing you to choose the one you want to control. You can also use the red target symbol which has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target symbol onto any media player object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the correct media player reference.
130
Purpose
The various Media Players in the Catalog generally provide standard controls needed in order to Play, Stop or Pause your media file, but sometimes you might find it useful to provide your own Play, Stop or Pause buttons, and not force the user to use the standard ones. For example, using the Universal Media Player you can choose to hide the media controls of an MPG file being played back. Using the Pause Media Player button you can control the MPG file but also you are free to make the Pause Media Player button look however you like and position it wherever you like on the screen.
Details
The only setting to configure with this catalog object is the media player to control.
Select The Media Player To Pause The combobox will list all media players on the page allowing you to choose the one you want to control. You can also use the red target symbol which has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target symbol onto any media player object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the correct media player reference.
131
Purpose
The various Media Players in the Catalog generally provide standard controls needed in order to Play, Stop or Pause your media file, but sometimes you might find it useful to provide your own Play, Stop or Pause buttons, and not force the user to use the standard ones. For example, using the Universal Media Player you can choose to hide the media controls of an MPG file being played back. Using the Stop Media Player button you can control the MPG file but also you are free to make the Stop Media Player button look however you like and position it wherever you like on the screen.
Details
The only setting to configure with this catalog object is the media player to control.
Select The Media Player To Stop The combobox will list all media players on the page allowing you to choose the one you want to control. You can also use the red target symbol which has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target symbol onto any media player object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the correct media player reference.
132
Purpose
At times you may want to stop all media which may be playing. This button, when clicked, will do just that.
133
Streaming Popup-Player
DHTML or NATIVE Use this button to display a media file. A streaming media file that has a file extension of .ra, .rm, or .ram will open the RealSystem G2 Player. Each user must have the RealSystem G2 Player installed on their computer in order to view your streaming media file. You can supply a link to the RealNetworks download page by dragging the Get RealPlayer button from the Navigation Objects category to your page.
Purpose
This Streaming Popup-Player object will allow you to point to an external Real Media file, and when the button is clicked, it will RUN that file, causing the RealPlayer to open and play the file. The file will not play within the ToolBook window, but rather will play in its own window. If you would like to play the file within the ToolBook window, use the Universal Media Player instead.
Details
The only setting that needs to be configured for this Streaming Popup-Player is which file to play. When accessing the Extended Properties for this object, you will be prompted to locate the file you wish to play. NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.
134
Video Stage
DHTML or NATIVE Use the stage object to display a digital video or graphic image. This object is used in conjunction with a media player: clicking the media player button at Reader level displays your video or graphic in the stage. If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming media files.
Purpose
This Video Stage catalog object is useful in a limited capacity. Its purpose is to provide other objects with an appropriate area on your screen to use when playing back a Clip. This object can be used in conjunction with Question Object media feedback, as well as when using the Hotword media players or the Icon media players.
Question Objects
When configuring a Question Object's feedback you can choose to play a Media Clip. When specifying the media clip to play, you can also specify a Stage to play the media in.
135
Hotword 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
DHTML or NATIVE A media player can play an audio file, a digital video file, or a single graphic image. For example, you can play audio files with .wav or .mid extensions, and video files with an .avi extensions. Other types of media files can be played if the proper software drivers are installed on your computer.
Purpose
This Hotword media player will allow you to add a Hotword to a text field, which the user can then click to play a media file. There are 6 versions of the Hotword media player in the catalog and the only difference between them is the image which gets inserted into the field. Functionally they behave identically.
Details
When you drag this object out of the catalog you have to drop it in a text field. If you drop it outside of a text field the Catalog will generate an error informing you of this specific requirement. If you drop it in a field, the catalog object will be inserted into your field as an in-line hotword image.
Extended Properties
When you access the Extended Properties of the hotword, you will be able to configure the hotword to play your media clip.
Name This is the name of the Hotword. If you have several of these in a field or on a single page, you may consider renaming each one so that they have a unique name. Clip To Play Since the Hotword media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox. Choose A Clip If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above. Play All Of Clip Before Continuing If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue. Play Clip Continuously In Background If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page.
136
Hotword
Start Clip When Entering The Page If selected, the clip will start as soon as the user enters the page. Automatically Close The Clip When Leaving The Page You may be thinking that a Clip must close itself when leaving the page, so what is this setting for, but if you put the Player on the background, the clip will automatically continue to play as you leave a page, as long as the page you are navigating to uses the same background. If you wish to prevent this behavior, turn this setting on.
137
Icon 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
DHTML or NATIVE A media player can play an audio file, a digital video file, or a single graphic image. For example, you can play audio files with .wav or .mid extensions, and video files with an .avi extension. Other types of media files can be played if the proper software drivers are installed on your computer.
Purpose
This Icon media player will allow you to add a button to your page which the user can then click to play a media file. There are 6 versions of the Icon media player in the catalog and the only difference between them is the Icon image which is applied to the button. Functionally they behave identically.
Extended Properties
When you access the Extended Properties of the Icon media player, you will be able to configure it to play your media clip.
Name This is the name of the media player. If you have several of these on your page you may consider renaming each one so that they have a unique name. Clip To Play Since the Icon media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox. Choose A Clip If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above. Play All Of Clip Before Continuing If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue. Play Clip Continuously In Background If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page. Start Clip When Entering The Page If selected, the clip will start as soon as the user enters the page. Automatically Close The Clip When Leaving The Page You may be thinking that a Clip must close itself when leaving the page, so what is this setting for, but if you put the Player on the background, the clip will automatically continue to play as you leave a page as long as the page you are navigating to uses the same background. If you wish to prevent this behavior, turn this setting on.
138
NAVIGATION OBJECTS
Native and DHTML Mode View:
Catalog Category
This entire category contains lots of objects with predefined functionality that allow a user to move from page to page, or even in some cases to another web site.
139
Hotspots Graphic
DHTML or NATIVE Use a Hotspots Graphic object to provide hot spots on a graphic that will be viewed in a Web browser. When a user clicks a hot spot, the Web page referenced by the hot spot displays in the browser. At Author level, the Hotspots Graphic object represents hot spots as shapes with dotted outlines. You can match the shape of a hot spot to a particular feature of your graphic, for example, a hot spot circle can be placed over part of a graphic that shows a coin. Double-click a hot spot shape to select it and then resize or move it if necessary. You can add an additional shape for a hot spot by dragging a draw object from the Catalog and dropping it on the Hotspots Graphic object.
In older versions of ToolBook this object was known as the Image Map object but in ToolBook 8 was renamed to Hotspots Graphic to help clarify the purpose of the object. When this object gets exported, technically it does get converted into an Image Map HTML object - so the old name was appropriate - although perhaps not descriptive enough. Hopefully the new name helps convey the intended use of this object.
Purpose
This object is intended to give you the ability to add navigation (hyperlink) abilities on an image by placing invisible clickable regions on top of the image, where each region can provide navigation to another page.
Details
The Hotspots Graphic object is actually a group of objects. The group contains a button object, which is used to display the graphic image you choose, and in addition various draw objects (circles, rectangles, polygons, etc) are placed on top of the button image to be used as clickable regions. Shown below is a Hotspots Graphic object configured to show a camera with 3 regions defined. The dashed line around the regions is only visible while at Author level so that you can see and manipulate the regions. The dashed line will disappear when in Reader level or when exported to DHTML.
By default, when you add a new Hotspots Graphic object to your page, it will have 3 clickable regions already in it. You can delete any region you don't need and add others. Note that you have to have at least one region, it won't let you delete a region if it is the only one left. To delete a region simply double click on it to select the region, and press your Delete key. To add a new region you simply need to add a new draw object into the group object. The easiest way to do this would be to drag a Draw Object out of the catalog and drop it onto the Hotspots Graphic object. When you do this the catalog will prompt you with the following dialog. You will want to select the option that says to Add To Group.
140
Hotspots Graphic
General Tab
Configuring the Hotspots Graphic object requires setting up some basic behavior.
Name This is the name of the Hotspots Graphic group object. If you have several of these on your page you may consider renaming each one so that they have a unique name. Auto Size If checked, the image being displayed will appear at normal size, and you will not be able to resize the object. If unchecked you are free to resize the image at Author level.
Options Tab
Configuring the Hotspots Graphic object requires identifying which image to display.
Image The image shown in a Hotspots Graphic object has to be a Bitmap Resource, so this option allows you to select a Bitmap Resource from the list currently imported into ToolBook. If the image you are needing to show is not currently a Bitmap Resource, you will be able to Import your image after clicking on the folder icon at the right edge of this option. Hot Spots All of the regions you define will be listed here, allowing quick access to the Hyperlink editor to set up your various hyperlinks. Each region is listed showing the name of the region, and the page it will navigate to.
141
Popup Index
DHTML or NATIVE When a user clicks the Go to page button at Reader level, a list of the page names in your book displays. Selecting the name of a page in the list causes navigation to that page. The Go to page button can be hidden or placed off of the page if you want the page list to show when the user right-clicks the page.
Purpose
This is one of two navigational controls in ToolBook which will permit you to show a list of pages (a menu of pages) to the user and allow them to choose which page they want to navigate to, and have the navigation occur without the need for any specialized code to be written. The other object is the Automatic Menu which operates similarly but has its own set of behaviors.
Details
This object will list all pages in your book, in page number order, but will skip any page who's Skip Navigation property is set to true. You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation property by using the Behavior tab of the Properties for Page dialog as shown below.
Extended Properties
When you access the Extended Properties of the Popup Index, you will be able to configure some basic settings.
Button Is Visible At Reader Level If you don't want the button to be visible to the user, check this option. If it is not visible you will need to provide some means of displaying the menu list. You can Trigger the button using the Actions Editor or an Action Trigger to simulate the user clicking on the button, or you can enable the following option. Display Menu When Page Is Right-Clicked This non-DHTML feature will allow the menu list to be displayed anytime the user right-clicks on the page. The menu will be displayed at the location the user clicked.
142
Automatic Menu
DHTML or NATIVE The automatic menu displays a list of the pages in the book as hyperlinks; a user can click on a page name to navigate to that page. In the properties dialog box for the automatic menu, you can select which pages to display.
Purpose
This is one of two navigational controls in ToolBook which will permit you to show a list of pages (a menu of pages) to the user and allow them to choose which page they want to navigate to, and have the navigation occur without the need for any specialized code to be written. The other object is the Popup Index which operates similarly.
General Tab
This object is quite a bit more flexible than the Popup Index is.
Include all pages in the book This is the default mode of a newly added Automatic Menu. All pages will be listed when this option is chosen. Include all pages in this page range You can isolate the range of pages to be shown in the list by using this option. Use the Start Page and End Page options to specify the starting and ending page, and those pages and all pages in-between will shown in the list. Include all pages in this background list You can specify that only pages belonging to certain backgrounds be included in the list. Use the Add and Remove buttons to build your desired background list. Only show named pages This option permits you to control whether a page will be listed if the page has no name. Many times pages are not named if they are considered pages users are not intended to see, perhaps pages containing data.
NOTE Regardless of which of the above options you choose, a page which has been configured for Skip Navigation will be excluded from the list. You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation setting as shown below.
143
Purpose
If you are building an informational kiosk type application which does not require any user interaction, you may consider using this object. When checked, it will automatically flip through all of the pages of your book at a specific time interval. The flipping will continue over and over until the checkbox is unchecked.
Details
To configure the number of seconds to delay between page flips, open the Extended Properties for the Kiosk Page Turner.
The default caption of this object is 5 Sec. Auto-Turn Pages, but feel free to change the caption to whatever you like.
144
Glossary 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE Navigate to the application's Glossary page or designated book.
Purpose
If you enable the glossary feature in ToolBook, normally the only way to get to the glossary is to click on a word in your application - and have the glossary open up to show the definition of that word. These 4 Glossary buttons will open up the Glossary and show the first entry without having to click on a look-up word. To quickly summarize, a Glossary is series of pages where the name of each page matches the text of hotwords in your book. For example if you want a Hotword with the text of apple in your application to open a glossary entry for the term apple, then you need to have a page in your book named apple, and that apple page must have a background named Glossary. Alternately you can place your glossary in a different book entirely. When creating the hotwords for your terms do not place hyperlinks on them, just leave them as plain hotwords.
Details
These buttons functional identically, only their visual appearance is different. Also, they will only work if your book has been configured to use a Glossary. You can configure your book to use a glossary by enabling a few options in the Properties for Book dialog.
Hotwords Link To Glossary Automatically If checked, when a user clicks on a hotword, the glossary will open to the definition of the Hotword term. Clicking Text Looks Up In Glossary Automatically This feature will permit you to click on any word even if it is not a hotword, and the word will be looked up in the glossary. This feature does not work in DHTML. Glossary File Name If you don't want to put the glossary pages in your current book you can specify the name of another book (in the exact same directory as the current book) where the glossary terms are located. Typically an external glossary book is named GLOSSARY.TBK but not is not mandatory.
145
Jump To URL 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE The Jump to URL object opens a specified Web page in a browser.
Purpose
Permits the navigate to a URL in the default browser.
Details
These two function only slightly different from each other. Jump To URL 1 This catalog object will permit the user to enter the URL of their choice and then press the GO button to navigate there. Jump To URL 2 This catalog object will permit the user to choose a URL from a list of URLs already populated in the combobox. When the selection is made, navigation will occur.
146
Purpose
This navigation control will allow a user to more forward and backwards through your book using the arrows and will also display to them the page they are on.
Details
This is a complex object, in that it does more than just tell you what page number you are on and what the total number of pages in your book is. It is very common to not want all pages in your project subject to being freely visited. Typically to control this, you mark those special pages as Skip Navigation, and navigation bars will not navigate to them. This object takes that into consideration when generating the current number and total number to be displayed in the Page display box. You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation property by using the Behavior tab of the Properties for Page dialog as shown below.
147
Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the Neuron download page on the Click2learn web site.
http://home.click2learn.com/en/toolbook/neuron.asp
148
Get Flash
DHTML or NATIVE This object contains a hyperlink to the Shockwave Flash download page on the Flash Web site. In ToolBook, when the user clicks this graphic the hyperlinked page will launch in the user's default browser. On an exported Web page, when the user clicks this graphic the browser will navigate to the player download page.
Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the Flash Player download page on the Macromedia web site.
http://www.macromedia.com/shockwave/download/
149
Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the Windows Media Player download page on the Microsoft web site.
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/players.asp
150
Get RealPlayer
DHTML or NATIVE This object contains a hyperlink to the RealPlayer download page on the RealNetworks Web site. In ToolBook, when the user clicks this graphic the hyperlinked page will launch in the user's default browser. On an exported Web page, when the user clicks this graphic the browser will navigate to the player download page.
Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the RealPlayer download page on the Real web site.
http://www.real.com/products/player/index.html
151
Get PowerPoint
DHTML or NATIVE This object contains a hyperlink to the PowerPoint Viewer download page on the Microsoft Web site. In ToolBook, when the user clicks this graphic the hyperlinked page will launch in the user's default browser. On an exported Web page, when the user clicks this graphic the browser will navigate to the download page.
Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the PowerPoint download page on the Microsoft web site.
http://office.microsoft.com/downloads/9798/ppview97.aspx
152
Purpose
These 5 objects are just button objects with hyperlinks applied to them. You could easily create them yourself by drawing a button and applying the appropriate type of hyperlink to the button.
153
Navigation Panel 1 - 43
DHTML or NATIVE Buttons on the navigation panel allow the user to move from one page to another. The panel as a whole cannot be resized, but you can change the size or position of individual buttons. If you want to change the size or position of an individual button in the panel, select it by doubleclicking on the button, and then resize or reposition the button.
Purpose
There are 43 various Navigation Panels in the catalog. Functionally they all work the same, the differences between them are visual differences. Also you may find that some Navigation Panels don't have the same number of buttons available.
Details
You may think that a Navigation Panel is just a series of buttons with Hyperlinks attached to them, and nothing more, but you would only be partially correct. In fact these Navigation Panels do have hyperlinks, but they also have additional logic which permit the buttons to enable or disable themselves appropriately. For example, let's say you are at the last page of your book. In this case you would likely not want the LAST button enabled or even the NEXT button enabled since they would effectively do nothing.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 43 different Navigation Panels in this category as shown below.
154
PAGES
Catalog Category
Looking for ideas for color schemes and navigation buttons to use in your latest project? You can look at the various Templates that ship with ToolBook. You can even use one of the Specialists to create a shell of a book for you, which have various Styles to choose from. Or you can even choose from 31 different Pages which are provided in the Pages category of the catalog. Each one contains a Backdrop and a navigational control bar that you can use in your own projects. Native and DHTML Mode View:
155
All Pages
DHTML or NATIVE Pages include a graphic and navigation buttons.
Purpose
The objects found in the Pages category offer a wide variety of pre-designed pages with Navigational controls built right in. Using one of these saves you time by not having to graphically design an appealing page layout and navigation controls.
Details
To use one, simply drag one onto your page. There are 31 different Pages to choose from in this category as shown below:
156
PLACEHOLDER OBJECTS
DHTML Mode View: Native Mode View:
Catalog Category
Placeholders that add Internet-specific features to a page when a book is exported for the Web, such as the ability to run a book using Neuron, to play an animated GIF file, or to run a Java applet.
157
Animated GIF
DHTML ONLY Use this placeholder to specify the name of an animated GIF file. The animated GIF file can be viewed in a Web browser after your application has been published to DHTML.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Animated GIF file you configure in this object will not animate within Native ToolBook. It will only animate in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
ToolBook does not have the built in ability to play an Animated GIF file, but a web browser can easily play an animated GIF file. A way was needed to permit you to specify that for your DHTML export, you wanted an Animated GIF file played at a specific location on your screen. This object fulfills that need. In ToolBook you will only see the first Frame of the Animated GIF file, but once exported to DHTML, you will see the entire play back when viewing in a browser.
Details
After adding a Animated GIF placeholder to your page, open the Extended Properties to configure the location of the Animated GIF file you want to play. NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.
158
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Image file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
Normally when you export a project to DHTML, the images you end up seeing in the Browser are the same images you put in your project to begin with. But what if you wanted a Banner Ad, or a some other image to occasionally change from one image to another, all without having to re-export your content. This object provides that ability to you. NOTE You will find that the Auto-Update Web Graphic object and the External URL Graphic object are nearly identical. The Auto-Update Web Graphic object has the added ability to refresh each time the page is loaded, whereas the External URL Graphic object does not.
Details
In order to make this work, you will need to place the image on a Web Server somewhere and then configure the Extended Properties of the Auto-Update Web Graphic object to point to it. You are then free to change that Image, or have someone else update it, and the next time the DHTML content is accessed, the new image will appear instead of the old one.
Extended Properties
URL of file to display Type in the full URL of the image file you wish to display. This needs to be a .JPG or .GIF file. Refresh whenever the page is entered If you want the image to be updated only once per session, don't check this box. If you want to ensure the image is updated every time the user enters that page of your DHTML, check the box. Browse If you don't know the exact address of the file, you can click the Browse button and a Browser will open. As you navigate in the Browser the URL you are presently on will appear automatically filled out in the URL Of File To Display field above.
159
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Text file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
Normally when you export a project to DHTML, the text you end up seeing in the Browser are the same text you put in your project to begin with. But what if you wanted a Web Counter, or a some other text to occasionally change, all without having to re-export your content. This object provides that ability to you.
Details
In order to make this work, you will need to place the Text file on a Web Server somewhere and then configure the Extended Properties of the Auto-Update Web Field object to point to it. You are then free to change that text file, or have someone else update it, and the next time the DHTML content is accessed, the new text will appear instead of the old text. Note that this also works in Native ToolBook.
Extended Properties
URL of file to display Type in the full URL of the text file you wish to display. This object supports the plain text (TXT) file format. To work in Netscape, the file extension for your text file must be .HTML. You can rename your text file with this extension and the file will display properly in both Internet Explorer and Netscape. Refresh whenever the page is entered If you want the text to be updated only once per session, don't check this box. If you want to ensure the text is updated every time the user enters that page of your DHTML, check the box. Browse If you don't know the exact address of the file, you can click the Browse button and a Browser will open. As you navigate in the Browser the URL you are presently on will appear automatically filled out in the URL Of File To Display field above.
160
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Image file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
Normally when you export a project to DHTML, the images you end up seeing in the Browser are the same images you put in your project to begin with. But what if you wanted a Banner Ad, or a some other image to occasionally change from one image to another, all without having to re-export your content. This object provides that ability to you. NOTE You will find that the Auto-Update Web Graphic object and the External URL Graphic object are nearly identical. The Auto-Update Web Graphic object has the added ability to refresh each time the page is loaded, whereas the External URL Graphic object does not. This catalog object is considered obsolete, and using the Auto-Update Web Graphic object is recommended.
Details
In order to make this work, you will need to place the image on a Web Server somewhere and then configure the Extended Properties of the External URL Graphic object to point to it. You are then free to change that Image, or have someone else update it, and the next time the DHTML content is accessed, the new image will appear instead of the old one.
Extended Properties
161
File
DHTML ONLY When you plan to export your application for the Web, you can use the file placeholder to specify a media file that will be accessed through a Web browser. After your application is available on the Web, a user viewing the application in a browser can play the file as long as the appropriate plugin or helper application is installed for the file type you specified.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the File you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
If you want to show 3rd party content inside of your DHTML content, this is the object to use. For example lets say you have a Word Document you would like you users to be able to read. As long as the Word application or Word Viewer program is installed on your clients machine, the file will be displayed within the bounds of the File placeholder which you placed on the page. This should work with virtually any file type, as long as the necessary Browser Plugin (or helper application) is installed on the end users machine. NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object only requires pointing to the File you wish to display. NOTE The caption of the Extended Properties dialog incorrectly says Select The PowerPoint File, rather than just Select A File. This is a known ToolBook bug which hopefully will be fixed soon.
162
Java
DHTML ONLY This placeholder allows you to incorporate a Java applet in a ToolBook application that will be exported to DHTML. For example, if you have an applet that displays text in a news tickertape format, specify the name of the tickertape applet in the Properties dialog box.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Java file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
If you want to implement a Java Applet into your Exported DHTML content, use the Java Placeholder to specify which Java Applet and to configure the settings the Applet will need to function. It is not possible to communicate with the Applet in order to changes its behavior once it has been exported. This may limit the types of Applets you can use in ToolBook's DHTML.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying a number of settings.
Name Specify the name of the object. Java Class Specify the name of the Java class file. Java Archive Specify the name of the Java archive file that contains the applet, usually a file with a .zip or .jar extension. Parameters Specify any parameters for the applet. Separate parameter/value pairs by commas.
163
Neuron
DHTML ONLY Use the Neuron placeholder to specify the name of a ToolBook .tbk file to display through a Web browser. Neuron is a plug-in or ActiveX control included with ToolBook that allows a .tbk file to be displayed in a Web browser. For more information about Neuron, open the Neuron Help file, NEURON.HLP.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the ToolBook (Neuron) file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This is a strange object, perhaps not useful to a wide audience - but very powerful nonetheless. It permits you to show a TBK file, running it through Neuron, within a page of your DHTML exported project. Technically you could probably use the File placeholder to do this too, but this Neuron placeholder allows you to configure some very specific Neuron related settings and parameters - a nice advantage over the File placeholder. What would you use this for? Well I suppose the possibilities are endless but here is an example. Lets say you have developed a functional calculator as a ToolBook application (don't laugh, I have done it - see my web site) and you want to provide a calculator in your DHTML export of a Quiz, alongside a complex mathematical Question Object. The user may need to use a calculator to figure out the proper answer and you can instruct them to open the Windows calculator or you can provide it right in your DHTML export alongside the question. Well, by using the Neuron Placeholder you could have it host the .TBK file that acts as the calculator. Simply position the Placeholder in an appropriate spot on your screen next to the Question Object and configure it to point to your .TBK file.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying a number of settings.
Name Specify the name of the object. Book To Run Specify the ToolBook file to be shown in the Placeholder.
164
Neuron
Use Secure Mode If selected, Secure mode will be used. In secure mode you can't do much. Question objects will likely fail to function. Bottom line is that you should likely never choose this option. Consult the Neuron Help file for a full explanation of what Secure Mode and Non Secure Mode are. Auto-size If selected, the placeholder object will resize automatically to the size of the book. Use Custom Background Color Select to use a custom background color. Sets the background color of the portion of the Neuron window that is not occupied by the ToolBook window. Use Mat Color Of Application Select to use the application's mat color as the background color. Sets the background color of the portion of the Neuron window that is not occupied by the ToolBook window. Select Custom Color Select to use a custom color. Sets the background color of the portion of the Neuron window that is not occupied by the ToolBook window. Command Line Specifies a custom command line that is used when ToolBook is launched. See EnterSystem in your Help file to learn how to read the command line and access the parameters you passed in using this command line. Application Will Not Close When Hidden - Internet Explore Option Only Specifies the actions that occur in the ToolBook instance when a Neuron control is hidden or shownafter the control has initially been shown. A control may be hidden and shown in Internet Explorer, for example, when a user navigates away from a browser page containing a Neuron control and then returns to that page. Close When Hidden, Restart When Shown - Internet Explore Option Only Specifies the actions that occur in the ToolBook instance when a Neuron control is hidden or shownafter the control has initially been shown. A control may be hidden and shown in Internet Explorer, for example, when a user navigates away from a browser page containing a Neuron control and then returns to that page. Close When Hidden - Internet Explore Option Only Specifies the actions that occur in the ToolBook instance when a Neuron control is hidden or shownafter the control has initially been shown. A control may be hidden and shown in Internet Explorer, for example, when a user navigates away from a browser page containing a Neuron control and then returns to that page.
165
PowerPoint 95
DHTML ONLY Use this placeholder to display a Microsoft PowerPoint 95 presentation in your DHTML content. Playback in a browser is accomplished using the Microsoft PowerPoint Animation plug-in [axplayer.exe] freely available from Microsoft.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the PowerPoint file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This placeholder object will permit you to play back a PowerPoint file within a page of your DHTML exported project. When playing back PowerPoint files in ToolBook under DHTML deployment, you have to choose between a PowerPoint 95 and PowerPoint 97+ placeholder. Because of a change Microsoft made in the playback engine for PowerPoint, it is not possible to offer one player. Your best option is to use the PowerPoint 97+ placeholder and ensure your PowerPoint file (.ppt) was created with a version of PowerPoint newer than version 95. However if you have to use version 95 files, use this placeholder and instruct your uses that they will need to install AXPLAYER.EXE which is freely available from Microsoft. Actually, if not already installed, the attempt to play one should prompt the user to install the version 95 player.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the name of the PowerPoint file you wish to play.
166
PowerPoint 97+
DHTML ONLY Use this placeholder to display a Microsoft PowerPoint 97 (or higher) presentation in your DHTML content. Playback in a browser is accomplished using the Microsoft PowerPoint Viewer plugin [ppview97.exe] freely available from Microsoft.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the PowerPoint file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This placeholder object will permit you to play back a PowerPoint file within a page of your DHTML exported project. When playing back PowerPoint files in ToolBook under DHTML deployment, you have to choose between a PowerPoint 95 and PowerPoint 97+ placeholder. Because of a change Microsoft made in the playback engine for PowerPoint, it is not possible to offer one player. Your best option is to use the PowerPoint 97+ placeholder and ensure your PowerPoint file (.ppt) was created with a version of PowerPoint newer than version 95. If you use this placeholder you may need to instruct your uses that they will need to install PPVIEW97.EXE which is freely available from Microsoft (or have PowerPoint 97 or higher installed). Actually, if not already installed, the attempt to play one should prompt the user to install the version 97+ player.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the name of the PowerPoint file you wish to play.
167
Reusable Graphic
DHTML or NATIVE The Reusable Graphic placeholder will display a graphic image on any number of pages. It stores the graphic file only once even though the graphic can be displayed multiple times throughout a book, which reduces the overall file size of the book. If you export your application to DHTML, the graphic displayed in the placeholder will be exported as a GIF or JPEG file.
Purpose
This placeholder is intended to be used when you want to use the same image in your project repeatedly and yet have ToolBook utilize the same resource for each. This makes for a smaller (file size) ToolBook file as well as a DHTML export which will load faster since the image is only stored once instead of multiple time.
Details
Technically, this object is just a Button object with a resource applied to it. You could easily accomplish the same thing by just drawing a button and applying a Normal Graphic image...but this catalog object takes care of some extra little features for you making it worth using. My recommendation is that you utilize a Web Graphic placeholder instead of the Reusable Graphic placeholder whenever possible.
General Tab
Configuring this object requires specifying a number of settings.
Name Although not mandatory, you can uniquely name each of your Reusable Graphic placeholders so you can tell them apart by name alone. Auto Border Toggles a border frame on and off when switching from Author and Reader level. Auto Size When you assign a graphic the frame can automatically snap to the correct size if this checkbox is checked. Note that this only works if you clear the Caption property of the Placeholder using the Properties for Button dialog.
168
Reusable Graphic
Options Tab
Additional setting can be configured using the options tab.
Image Displays the currently chosen Bitmap Resource. Use the Choose button to select a resource. HTML Border Width If you want the exported image to have a frame around it, specify the thickness of the frame using this setting. Output Format This setting is supposed to control how the image gets exported, as a JPG or GIF, but it would appear that the setting has no effect. The logic which is current used to determine if a Bitmap Resource is exported as a JPG or GIF, is based on Color Depth and whether or not you have assigned a Chromakey value to the resource.
169
Web Graphic
DHTML or NATIVE Use the Web Graphic placeholder to display a GIF or JPEG file when you plan to export your application to DHTML. Both GIF and JPEG files are in a format suitable for display on the Web. When you use this placeholder, the graphic is not exported as a new file during the export process, but rather the original file is copied to the export folder.
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the image you configure in this object will show up within Native ToolBook, however the image you see is simply the image as it appeared when initially imported. If you later modify the external file, ToolBook will not know you modified the external file and so the displayed image will not change.
Purpose
This placeholder is intended to be used when you want to use a JPG or GIF image in ToolBook and you plan to export to DHTML, and additionally you want to ensure the export process utilizes the original JPG or GIF image that you asked ToolBook to display. Although this object shows up in the Native Catalog view, it really serves no useful purpose unless your intention is to Export to DHTML.
Details
This object works sort of like a media clip, where the file you are interested in is not stored inside of the ToolBook file but rather is stored externally. When using the Reusable Graphic placeholder on the other hand, the image is actually pulled into the ToolBook file and the external image is no longer needed. This Web Graphic placeholder will require the presence of the external file, exactly where you said it would be, when it comes time to export to DHTML. If the file is no longer there, an error will be shown to you in the DHTML error log. The external file is needed during the DHTML Export because the export engine will attempt to copy that file into the Web Export folder. My recommendation is that you utilize a Web Graphic placeholder whenever possible which will ensure your DHTML images looks the best when displayed in a browser, because your original images are shown in the browser rather than a new GIF or JPG that ToolBook created for you.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the external file you wish to display. NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.
170
Web Page
DHTML ONLY The Web Page Placeholder object will display the current contents of an HTML file located on a Web server. When your ToolBook II application is exported to DHTML and viewed in a browser, the specified file will be displayed within the bounds of the Web Page Placeholder. When running in Internet Explorer, an HTML file with hyperlinks will correctly display linked pages within the confines of the placeholder. In Netscape, using the Web Page Placeholder to display an HTML page will display properly, however, clicking a hyperlink in the HTML page will cause the termination of the ToolBook DHTML application because Netscape is unable to display the linked page within the placeholder (the entire DHTML window navigates to the linked page).
WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the web page you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This placeholder will allow you to specify an area on your exported DHTML page where you want another web page to be displayed, permitting you to view a web page as a component of another web page. If you want to show a web page within Native ToolBook (not exporting to DHTML) you will instead need to utilize the Microsoft Internet Explorer ActiveX control.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the URL you wish to display.
171
172
Catalog Category
The Multiple Choice question objects provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. Using other objects in the Scoring and Tracking category you can collect scoring information about your Question objects which you have placed in your book. Native and DHTML Mode View:
NOTE Instructor user have a Question Summary option in the Tools menu which will permit you to generate a Text file containing a complete answer key for all question objects in your book.
173
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
DHTML or NATIVE Multiple choice buttons allow the user to click a button to choose an answer. To display a question or statement, drag a text field from the Catalog, drop it on the page, and then enter your text. If you want to add an additional answer choice, select one answer button and choose Duplicate from the Edit menu.
Purpose
The Multiple Choice question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer, but you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
The functionality of Multiple Choice objects 1 - 66 are identical. Each come standard with 4 preconfigured buttons to serve as the answers. The only real difference is the Graphics applied to the buttons.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need. If you remove all but two, you might as well just use a True-False question instead.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Multiple Choice question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the question text [What color is the sun?] and the Multiple Choice question object are not one and the same object. The Multiple Choice question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Multiple Choice question object.
Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just button objects with Captions and Graphic Resources assigned which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible answers.
174
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page.
175
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button (or field) that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... This feature does NOT add more answer buttons to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 buttons then read the Adding More Answer section above. The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 buttons which are initially configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3 incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3 incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for
176
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in the set of displayed answers.
Edit... This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct In the event your Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
177
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated. If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5 pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts). But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 25% and 75% for the two options. Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total percentage.
178
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
179
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect, they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question. Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text. The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message. For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you probably didn't know about.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)
180
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
181
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
182
Multiple Choice 1 - 66
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
183
Definable Multiple
DHTML or NATIVE A definable multiple choice question allows the user to simply click on an object to choose an answer. You can define a graphic, a button, a field, or another type of object as an answer. Place your answer objects on the page before following the steps available in the Coach window.
Purpose
The Definable Multiple Choice question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer, but you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
The basic functionality of the Definable Multiple Choice question object is essentially the same as the functionality of Multiple Choice objects 1 - 66 objects. The big difference between a standard Multiple Choice question object and this object is that you can choose to use Any object on your page as an Answer. You are not limited to using buttons. For this reason the question object is not a group of buttons - like the standard Multiple Choice question object. Instead it is a control object - as shown below:
This object is only seen at Author level - hiding itself at Reader level so the user does not see it. When you want to configure the Definable Multiple Choice question object. You simply select it and then open the Extended Properties dialog. When a user clicks on one of the correct or incorrect answers which you have configured for this question object, a BlueGreen dashed line will be drawn around the object to let the user know their selection was made. Unfortunately this color is hard coded into the question object and there is no configurable setting that you can adjust to change that color.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Multiple Choice question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example which utilizes various polygons, a text field and a Definable Multiple Choice question object. Notice that the question text [Which of the following is an Octagon?] and the Definable Multiple Choice question object are not one and the same object. The Definable Multiple Choice question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Definable Multiple Choice question object.
184
Definable Multiple
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
185
Definable Multiple
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. o Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answers tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. You will have one entry for each object that is in your question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... Use this option to select a named object on your page to be used as an answer for this question. The object you select can be a correct or incorrect answer.
186
Definable Multiple
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct In the event your Definable Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct answer, and you want the user to be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated.
187
Definable Multiple
If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5 pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts). But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 25% and 75% for the two options. Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total percentage. Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
188
Definable Multiple
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
189
Definable Multiple
Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
190
Definable Multiple
All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
191
Definable Multiple
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
192
Multiple Choice
DHTML or NATIVE Multiple choice buttons allow the user to click a button to choose an answer. To display a question or statement, drag a text field from the Catalog, drop it on the page, and then enter your text. If you want to add an additional answer choice, select one answer button and choose Duplicate from the Edit menu.
Purpose
This Multiple Choice question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer, but you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
Although this question, which by default is configured to look like a camera, looks completely different than a standard Multiple Choice question object, it is actually identical to a standard Multiple Choice question object. The only real difference is the Graphics applied to the buttons, and that the buttons are overlapping each other. Below you will see that I have selected all 5 of the objects within this Multiple Choice question object. You can see that there are 5 objects overlapping each other and that there are no captions applied to any of the buttons. The next image shows the various buttons spread out so you can see that each button is just a piece of the whole image. This way each button object can sense when you have clicked on a different part of the camera.
Of course, unlike a standard question object, this one takes more work to set up because you have to do some graphic work in an Image Editing program.
Removing Answers
If 5 answers is too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure any Multiple Choice question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the following example does not utilize the Camera object however since the standard Multiple Choice question objects function identically to this catalog object, the example is still valid. Notice that the question text [What color is the sun?] and the Multiple Choice question object are not one and the same object. The Multiple Choice question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Multiple Choice question object.
193
Multiple Choice
Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just button objects with Captions and Graphic Resources assigned which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible answers.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
194
Multiple Choice
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
195
Multiple Choice
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... This feature does NOT add more answer buttons to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 buttons then read the Adding More Answer section above. The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 buttons which are initially configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3 incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3 incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in the set of displayed answers.
Edit... This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct In the event your Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option.
196
Multiple Choice
Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated. If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5 pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts). But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 25% and 75% for the two options.
197
Multiple Choice
Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total percentage. Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
198
Multiple Choice
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
199
Multiple Choice
Feedback Text This question is already configured with some appropriate feedback text for the answers. Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
200
Multiple Choice
All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
201
Multiple Choice
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
202
Purpose
The Multiple Choice Fields question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer, but you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
The basic functionality of the Multiple Choice Fields question object is essentially the same as the functionality of Multiple Choice 1 - 66 objects. The big difference between a standard Multiple Choice question object and this object is that the answers are displayed in text fields instead of as button captions. The importance of this is that a button caption can't exceed a single line of text, but a field can contain word-wrapped text. When a user selects one of the answers the fillColor of the field turns Yellow to show the user that a selection has been made, as shown below.
In fact the question object will insist that your fields have a fill color of White. If you attempt to change this fill color it will reset back to white the next time the question is reset. It seems to have been designed to force the non selected answers to be filled with white and the selected answers filled with yellow. There is an undocumented way that Instructor users (sorry Assistant users) can take control of the two color values, and it requires setting two properties of the question object. Displayed below is the Property Browser showing the 2 property settings you need to adjust. The ColorChosen and ColorNotChosen. You can change these to any RGB value you like.
203
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a this question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the question text [Which statement is not true?] and the question object are not one and the same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the question object.
Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just field objects which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible answers.
You can even change the Border Style of the fields to none if you don't want the border around the edge.
204
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
205
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each field that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of fields in your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... This feature does NOT add more answer fields to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 fields then read the Adding More Answer section above. The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 fields which are initially configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3 incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3 incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in the set of displayed answers.
206
Edit... This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. The text you place in the fields must be raw text. Any formatting (bold, italics, colored characters) will be removed in the randomization process. If randomization is not used, then formatting can be used. Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct In the event your Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
207
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated. If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5 pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts). But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 25% and 75% for the two options. Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total percentage.
208
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
209
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
210
Feedback Text By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect, they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question. Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text. The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message. For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you probably didn't know about.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
211
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
212
Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
213
214
QUESTIONS (TRUE-FALSE)
Catalog Category
The True-False question objects provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. Using other objects in the Scoring and Tracking category you can collect scoring information about your Question objects which you have placed in your book. Native and DHTML Mode View:
NOTE Instructor user have a Question Summary option in the Tools menu which will permit you to generate a Text file containing a complete answer key for all question objects in your book.
215
True-False 1 - 52
DHTML or NATIVE The true/false question object contains two answer choices. To present a statement that users must evaluate as true or false, position a text field near the answer choices and then type a statement in the text field.
Purpose
The True-False question object provides two answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices.
Details
The functionality of True-False 1 - 52 objects are identical. Each come standard with 2 preconfigured buttons to serve as the answers. The only real difference is the Graphic applied to the buttons. Note that the only real difference between a Multiple Choice question and a True-False question, is that a True-False question has only two answers. You could actually take a Multiple Choice question object and remove all but two answer and effectively have a True-False question.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a True-False question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the question text [The moon is made of cheese?] and the True-False question object are not one and the same object. The True-False question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the True-False question object.
Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just button objects with Captions and Graphic Resources assigned which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible answers.
216
True - False 1 - 52
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 217
True - False 1 - 52
Answers This area will list the 2 possible answers to the question. Edit... This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.
Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
218
True - False 1 - 52
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answer to be worth 0% of that 1 point. To ensure this is the applied behavior, ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and do not worry about this Score Weight option. This feature is kind of useless for a True-False question. It makes much more sense for other question objects which have more than 2 answers. Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where the correct response is worth 100% and the incorrect one is worth 0%. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number.
219
True - False 1 - 52
Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses Do not bother configuring these options as they will have no influence over the operation of the question object. These settings should not appear in this dialog since they have no meaning to a True-False question...as it is not possible to get a True-False question Partially correct.
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list both of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
220
True - False 1 - 52
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect, they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question. Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text. The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message. For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you probably didn't know about.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
221
True - False 1 - 52
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Response Is o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Since it is not possible to answer a True-False question and get it partially correct, this option is pointless.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
222
True - False 1 - 52
Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
223
True - False 1 - 52
224
QUESTIONS (VARIOUS)
Catalog Category
The question objects in this category provide answer choices that allow a user specify a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. Using other objects in the Scoring and Tracking category you can collect scoring information about your Question objects which you have placed in your book. Native Mode View:
NOTE Instructor user have a Question Summary option in the Tools menu which will permit you to generate a Text file containing a complete answer key for all question objects in your book.
225
Definable Arrange 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE An arrange objects question allows the user to move specified objects. At Reader level, the anchor object appears in its correct location. The other defined objects automatically appear in randomized locations. The Colored Blocks is an example of a definable arrange objects question. You can specify feedback for any answer by selecting the button labeled Colored Blocks, and then clicking the Extended Properties button on the toolbar. In the Properties for Question dialog box, click one of the Feedback tabs and define your feedback.
Purpose
The Definable Arrange question object allows the user to drag objects to their correct locations on the screen. Although these two catalog objects may appear at first glance to be complete different question types, they are in fact one and the same. The real difference between the two is that Definable Arrange 1 is not at all configured yet, and Definable Arrange 2 is already configured with 4 dragable objects which look like a block puzzle. The actual question object itself is just this button. This button is never seen by the user, as it is only shown when at Author level.
Details
This is an interesting question type in that it allows a user to drag objects on the page, but it is peculiar in function in that the starting position of the objects is an area of your screen designated to be the box that holds the objects - often piled on top of each other. This question can be thought of sort of like an old fashioned Jig Saw puzzle where typically you have a nice large area where you put the puzzle together but the unplaced pieces are left in the box, all piled on top of each other.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Arrange question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Assemble the following diagram.] and the Definable Arrange question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page.
The image of the gears above is actually 6 separate Paint objects which had been imported into Toolbook. A graphic utility program was used to slice the image into the 6 different elements so as to make a kind of puzzle to use with this
226
Definable Arrange 1, 2
question type. Below, you will see that I have spread out the objects a bit and selected them so that you can distinguish between the different elements that make up the whole image.
NOTE You will likely want to ensure that the components of your question are near the top most layer of the screen. You can set the layer position in the upper right corner of the Property editor for the individual pieces. If you set the layer number too low you may end up with users dropping an object under another screen object and not being able to pick it back up again.
227
Definable Arrange 1, 2
Basic Use
The user can drag the pieces out of the box and try to place it in the correct position. The user can also re-drag an already placed piece if they change their mind about the position. Various options will permit you to control the functionality of this question object. For example you can choose to have an incorrectly place piece be returned back to the box. You can have the pieces snap into place if the user drops it within close proximity to the correct location. All of these options are covered in the configuration settings below.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Object In Which The Parts Will Be Randomized This is the object (the box) in which you want the parts of your question randomly placed into. You are only permitted to select a named object so ensure the object has some name. The bounds of the selected object will used as the rectangular bounding area to put the pieces into. Note that <none> is a valid option here. If selected the entire area of your page will be used as the box.
Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page.
228
Definable Arrange 1, 2
Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the elements on the page are considered to be "parts" of the question, which can be dragged and positioned by the user.
Objects To Move This area will list all of the possible parts to the question. The symbol next to each possible part shown in this list defines if the part is an Anchor or not. An Anchor is a part which is intentionally left in its correct position giving the user a point of reference to arrange the other pieces around. Click on the symbol to toggle between an Anchor symbol and a blank symbol. If blank, the part will be included with the randomized pieces. Add... Use this button to add more screen elements (parts) to the question object. You can only add parts that have names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this. It is a good idea to name the parts with unique names so you can tell if they are all properly included in the Objects To Move listing.
229
Definable Arrange 1, 2
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Positioning Tolerance For Correct Placement Users are unlikely to have the dexterity or patience to try to position your pieces in the correct position down to the exact pixel. Because of this you can set a tolerance value so that even if the user is off by a little, they still get it correct. By default the value is 16 pixels of tolerance. You can adjust this value if you want to fine tune the tolerance. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Look For Multiple Objects With Same Name This is a strange option. Here's how it works. Lets say that your puzzle contains lots of parts of which 3 look identical. If they look identical, then the user will likely not know for sure where the 3 pieces go, since they could be used interchangeably. To account for this odd scenario, if you name all 3 identical parts the same, and if you enabled this option, ToolBook will permit the user to put any of the 3 pieces in any of the correct 3 locations and still count it as a correct answer. Talk about flexible! Snap Objects To Closest Defined Position This setting works in conjunction with the Tolerance option listed above. If you would like the part to snap into place if dropped within the tolerance range of a possible drop location, turn on this option. Users like this option because if it snaps they know they at least dropped in a real position and not in between where two parts should be located. Use Anchor Object If you don't want to use an Anchor object at all and want all pieces randomly placed, you can enable this option. If you have an anchor object already defined when you close the Extended Properties, it will no longer be an Anchor object. Choose Anchor Randomly If you don't care which one of the part is used as the anchor but do want one of them used, turn on this option and ToolBook will randomly pick one of the parts to be the Anchor. Reject Incorrectly Placed Objects If you want an incorrectly placed part to be returned to its original spot in the Container area, enable this option. Leaving this option unchecked will result in the incorrectly placed object remaining where the user placed it.
230
Definable Arrange 1, 2
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 50% of the answer and the 5 remaining ones to be worth only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 50% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 5 options.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
231
Definable Arrange 1, 2
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response for: You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. If enabled, you get to choose when feedback is given. The choices are:
232
Definable Arrange 1, 2
- When any object is dragged - When an object is dragged to a Correct position - When an object is dragged to an Incorrect position - Never provide immediate feedback Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Except Anchor This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field with the exception of the Anchor objects. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
233
Definable Arrange 1, 2
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
234
Definable Arrange 1, 2
Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
235
Definable Drop
DHTML or NATIVE With this question, the user chooses an answer by dragging an answer object to the drop target object. You allow an object to act as the drop target by selecting it and clicking the Properties button on the toolbar. On the Drag & Drop tab in the Properties dialog box, select Accepts dropped objects. To allow an answer object to be dragged at Reader level, select the object and click the Properties button on the toolbar. In the Properties dialog box, click the Drag & Drop tab and select the Can be dragged option.
Purpose
The Definable Drop question object allows the user to drag objects to their correct locations on the screen. The actual question object itself is just this button. This button is never seen by the user, as it is only shown when at Author level.
Details
This object is somewhat similar to the Definable Arrange question object type. The Definable Drop question allows you to configure your question so that the user can drag objects onto a predefined 'drop area'.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Drop question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Drag the Primary Colors from the Left Flip Chart to the Right Flip Chart.] and the Definable Drop question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page. The 6 dragable objects I chose to use in this example are field objects, as you can see on the left Flip Chart. To be used as a possible answer to this question, the objects you decide to use must have a name. In this case I named each field with the color each represents.
236
Definable Drop
NOTE You will likely want to ensure that the components of your question are near the top most layer of the screen. You can set the layer position in the upper right corner of the Property editor for the individual pieces. If you set the layer number too low you may end up with users dropping an object under another screen object and not being able to pick it back up again.
Basic Use
The user can drag an object (a color) from its initial position on the screen and drop it somewhere else on the screen, hopefully in the correct area which is represented by the drop area object. The user can also re-drag an already dropped piece if they change their mind about the position.
237
Definable Drop
You will definitely want to choose the option "Can be dragged..." and it is highly advised that your turn on the Reset checkbox - which will automatically fill in the position for you based on the current position of the object.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Object That Will Act As Drop Target This is the object (the drop area) in which you want the answers of your question to be dragged into. You are only permitted to select a named object so ensure the object has some name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
238
Definable Drop
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question, which can be dragged and positioned by the user.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is an correct or incorrect. Add... Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.
239
Definable Drop
Edit... Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different object. This is no different than using the Delete option and Add option to remove an answer and to add a new answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Allow Multiple Responses If checked you can specify more than one object in your Answers list that are considered correct. If you don't check this option you will not be able to specify more than one answer as being the correct answer. Reject Incorrect Answers If you want an incorrectly placed answer to be returned to its original spot, enable this option. Leaving this option unchecked will result in the incorrectly placed object remaining where the user dropped it. Snap Dropped Objects To Center Of Target If you want the dropped object to be moved to the center of the Drop Area after the user drops it, assuming they drop it somewhere within the bounds of the Drop Area, then enable this option. If you leave this option disabled, the objects will simply stay where you drop them.
240
Definable Drop
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 50% of the answer and the 2 remaining correct ones to be worth only 25% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 50% for the first correct answer and 25% for each of the remaining 2 correct answers.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
241
Definable Drop
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled.
242
Definable Drop
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
243
Definable Drop
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback. Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
244
Definable Drop
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
245
Definable Match
DHTML or NATIVE A match item question allows the user to drag an arrow from a source object to a target object. For example, a user could press down the mouse button on a graphic and then drag the cursor to a text field that displays a description of the graphic. Place your objects on the page before following the steps available in the Coach window.
Purpose
The Definable Match question object allows the user to draw a red arrow between two objects on the screen to indicate a correct answer. The actual question object itself is just this button. This button is never seen by the user, as it is only shown when at Author level.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Match question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Match the images to the definitions.] and the Definable Match question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page. The 5 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The 5 textual definitions are just 5 Field objects containing the text definition of the food. To be used as a possible answers to this question, all 10 objects must have a unique name. In this case I named each image with the name of the food (such as "banana") and I named the field objects in this fashion "banana-text".
Basic Use
The user can drag an arrow from the food to the text definitions. This arrow is always red - unfortunately. The arrow tip will always snap to the center of the object it was matched to. The arrow tail will always snap to the center of the object being dragged from.
246
Definable Match
In DHTML, the arrow will not appear as a straight line, but rather as a series of stair stepped lines. This is unfortunately the only way the browser can do this. Essentially Netscape cannot dynamically draw lines that are not vertical or horizontal, so this stair step approach is the only way Netscape can do it. Internet Explorer on the other hand can draw a diagonal line, but to keep the export consistent between browsers, it was determined necessary to force Internet Explorer to also draw stair stepped lines too.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
247
Definable Match
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question, which can be dragged and positioned by the user.
Matching Object Name This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Each line will show the Source object, an arrow and then the correct matching object. Add... Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.
248
Definable Match
Edit... Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different set of matching objects.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Allow Multiple Responses To Matching Objects Choose this option if you want to allow the user to draw more than one arrow to the same object. If this is not enabled, a user is restricted to drawing only one arrow to a specific object. If an attempt is made to draw the second arrow the first arrow drawn will disappear and permit the second arrow to remain. Reject Incorrect Answers If you want the arrow to only remain on the screen when a correct match is made, choose this option. If you leave this option unchecked, any arrow drawn will remain drawn on the screen even if the match was incorrect.
249
Definable Match
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the first answer to be worth 60% of the answer and the 4 remaining ones to be worth only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 60% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 4 answers.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
250
Definable Match
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback When A Correct Match Is Made You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
251
Definable Match
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
252
Definable Match
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
253
Definable Match
Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
254
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE A drag objects question allows the user to match a text label with another object, such as a graphic. The user drags the text label, and all target objects are stationary.
Purpose
The Drag Object question allows the user to drag the question object to a position on the screen where the arrow portion of the question object is pointing at an appropriate answer. The actual question object itself is just this button, which has a caption and a graphic assigned to it. You are free to change the caption as well as the graphic too if you like.
There are 4 of these in the Catalog, and all behave the same, the only difference is the color of the arrow and the direction the arrow is pointing.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Drag Object question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Match the term to the image.] and the Drag Object question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page. The 5 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The word PEAR along with the arrow is the Drag Object itself.
Basic Use
The user can drag the word and arrow anywhere and drop it on any object on the screen. This arrow is just a graphic, you can switch it out to any image you like. The tip of the arrow must be in the target object to register as a match.
255
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
If the image is to the right of the caption, the upper right corner of the question object (in this case that would be the same as the tip of the arrow) is the precise point that is used to determine if your match was made. If the image is to the left of the caption, the upper left corner of the question object (in this case that would be the same as the tip of the arrow) is the precise point that is used to determine if your match was made. You can put several Drag Object questions on your screen so that you can have more than one item to match. In my example if I wanted the user to identify all 5 foods, I would need 5 Drag Object questions on the page.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked.
256
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be the possible answers to the question.
Possible Target Objects This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. It is likely that only one object on the page is considered the right answer but in some cases the right answer could be one of many objects on the page. Add... Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have
257
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Reject Unrecognized Answers If you want the arrow to return to its initial position if the user drops it in the wrong location, enable this option. Snap To Center Of Target If you want the arrow tip to snap to the center of the target area if dropped on a recognized object, enable this option. A recognized object is essentially any object you have listed in the Possible Target Objects list - whether it is currently configured as a correct or incorrect object.
258
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you configured two correct placed to drop this object, and one was 'more' correct than the other. In this case perhaps you want to ensure that the more correct answer is a full 100% of the 1 point, and the less correct answer is worth only 80% of that 1 point. In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 100% for the first correct target and 80% for the other correct target.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
259
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox.
260
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
261
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
262
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
263
Drag Text
NATIVE ONLY This object allows you to define an ordered list of words or phrases as the correct response to a question and test the user's ability to reconstruct the list in proper order. The user answers the question by dragging the phrases to the correct position. The lines of text are displayed in a random order when the object is reset. You specify when a question will be reset on the General tab of the Properties dialog box.
Purpose
The Drag Text question allows the user to rearrange lines of text in a field by dragging lines up or down in the list. This object does not work in DHTML and therefore can be used only for Natively distributed applications.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Drag Text question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Organize the events in date order] and the Drag Text question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page.
Basic Use
The user can drag the textlines up and down in the list to change the order that the lines are listed. Feel free to change the color, font size, etc. of the question object to fit your needs. The text for each entry is limited to a single line - which cannot word wrap. In Reader mode the text lines will be displayed to the user in a random order. In Author mode the text lines will be displayed to you in the correct order.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
264
Drag Text
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
265
Drag Text
Answers Tab
Text To Be Ordered This area will list all of the answers to the question. If you want to control the formatting of the text in the field (such as font size, color), do so by selecting the Field object in the Drag Text object and then use the Properties for Field settings to set the font characteristics. It is not possible to format the text on a character by character basis. In my example above I used a hyphen character at the beginning of the lines to help the user see that they are different entries. You can use this too, or perhaps a bullet character (press ALT-0149) will do nicely - don't worry that it shows in the editor as a vertical bar character.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
266
Drag Text
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Text To Be Ordered This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Each Element In Correct Position This value is computed automatically and cannot be changed. It is essentially the value achieved when you take 100 and divide it by the number of text lines in your question. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
267
Drag Text
Enable Feedback After Each Move You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to trigger Delayed Feedback after each move. For this question type there is no real concept of Immediate Feedback.
268
Drag Text
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
269
Drag Text
o o
Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
270
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE A drop target object displays a graphic to visually show the user where to drop an answer or multiple answers. The user chooses an answer by dragging an answer object to the drop target object. To allow an answer object to be dragged at Reader level, select the object at Author level and click the Properties button on the toolbar. In the Properties dialog box click the Drag & Drop tab and select the Can be dragged option.
Purpose
The Drop Target question object allows the user to drag objects to a drop target and drop them. As you can see this question object comes in 4 versions, all identical in function but each having a different Target image. The actual question object itself is the image.
You may be thinking, "Hey, isn't this just another form of a Definable Drop question?" And you would be right. The advantage to using these Drop Targets is that they already have nice images to use as a drop area. You will find that either of the question types may suite your needs equally well.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Drop Target question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Put all of the Bananas in the box] and the Drop Target question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page. The 9 dragable food objects I chose to use in this example are Paint objects. To be used as a possible answer to this question, the objects you decide to use must have a name. In this case I named each to be the actual name of the food item. Since I have two of each, I named the 2nd of each with a "2" on the end of the name ("banana" and "banana2").
271
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
Basic Use
The user can drag an object (a food item) from its initial position on the screen and drop it somewhere else on the screen, hopefully in the correct area which is represented by the Drop Target object. The user can also re-drag an already dropped item if they change their mind about the position.
272
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
You will definitely want to choose the option "Can be dragged..." and it is highly advised that your turn on the Reset checkbox - which will automatically fill in the position for you based on the current position of the object.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Object That Will Act As Drop Target Normally this is set to <self> which means "use the question object itself as the target". You can also select any other Named object which is a part of the Question object group. By default there will be two objects already defined for you to choose from. o o Button "Drop Target - which is the button object which is displaying the image (the box for example). Using this setting would typically end up with the same results as choosing <self>. Ellipse "Top" - which is set to transparent and no border making it hard to see but it is there. This can be used to help focus the drop area to a specific spot rather than using the whole image. For example you could use the ellipse and ensure that it is small and positioned to cover just the Bulls Eye portion of the Archery target.
Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page.
273
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question, which can be dragged and positioned by the user.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers (correct or incorrect) to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is an correct or incorrect. In my example I will let the <Anything else> option cover all of my incorrect responses rather than adding them to the list. Add... Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.
274
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
Edit... Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different object. This is no different than using the Delete option and Add option to remove an answer and to add a new answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Allow Multiple Responses If checked you can specify more than one object in your Answers list that are considered correct. If you don't check this option you will not be able to specify more than one answer as being the correct answer. Reject Incorrect Answers If you want an incorrectly placed answer to be returned to its original spot, enable this option. Leaving this option unchecked will result in the incorrectly placed object remaining where the user dropped it. Snap Dropped Objects To Center Of Target If you want the dropped object to be moved to the center of the Drop Area after the user drops it, assuming they drop it somewhere within the bounds of the Drop Area, then enable this option. If you leave this option disabled, the objects will simply stay where you drop them.
275
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 50% of the answer and the 2 remaining correct ones to be worth only 25% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 50% for the first correct answer and 25% for each of the remaining 2 correct answers.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
276
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled.
277
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
278
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback. Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
279
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
280
Purpose
The Fill In The Blank (FIB) question object provides an editable field in which a user can type a response into.
Details
The functionality of the Fill In The Blank 1 and Fill In The Blank 2 are the same. One is configured to permit a single line of text and the other will accept multiple lines of word wrapped text.
General Behavior
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Fill In The Blank question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Enter the name for this US Currency.] and the Fill In The Blank question object are not one and the same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above the question object.
The Fill In The Blank question object will permit you to specify one or more possible correct answers. The answers can be single or multi-word answers. Pressing Tab or Enter or clicking elsewhere on the screen will cause the question to process the answer.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
281
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
282
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... Allows you to add a new potential correct or incorrect answer.
Match Text This it the typical setting and ONLY setting supported under DHTML. It indicates that you wish to match the text entered by the use to text you have preconfigured. OpenScript Expression This non-DHTML setting allows you to indicated that you wish to use programming logic to determine if the response is correct. If you choose this option the Response Text field turns into a Answer Definition field to permit you to enter an appropriate OpenScript expression. Response Text One or more words which represent an incorrect or a correct answer to the question.
283
Answer Definition An OpenScript statement which will evaluate to True or False. If it evaluates to True, the answer is considered correct. If the it evaluates to False, the answer is considered incorrect. The value the user typed in can be reference by using the term IT. Example OpenScript Expression: [this would permit the user to type "A Dollar Bill" or "The Dollar", etc.
IT contains "Dollar"
Match Case Permits you to specify that each character of the answer must be properly upper or lowercased in order to be considered a match. Match Word Order If your answer is comprised of multiple words, word order may be important. If the order of the words in the users response is important then check this option. Confirm if Recognized If the user types in an answer that is considered a match only because one of the above options (such as Word Order) was configured to allow the answer to be considered a positive match, you can enable this setting. The user will see a prompt asking if their answer is really a match to one of your answers, such as in this dialog:
Enable "Sounds Like" One of the problems with a Fill In The Blank question is that spelling counts. If the user misspells the answer, they are liable to get it wrong. ToolBook therefore incorporates a Sounds Like option which allows certain letter combinations to be incorrect but still consider their response to be a positive match. For example if a valid response can be PHONE, the user can type in FONE and get it correct, because both sound the same when pronounced.
Ignore Punctuation If this option is enabled, all punctuation characters in the response are ignored when attempting to match the users response. Confirm By Asking If The User Meant This option is directly tied to the Confirm if Recognized option above.
Edit... This option allows you to change the configuration options for the list of possible answers.
284
Cannot Change Responses This will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they type in an answer and do anything to commit their answer (essentially anything that would move focus out of the field), and then attempt to re-answer it...they will be told that the question is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want any correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and any incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 100% of the answer and the 2nd correct one [because "buck" is slang for "dollar" so should not be worth as much] to be worth only 90% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 100% and 90% for the two options.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
285
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
286
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect, they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question. Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text. The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message. For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you probably didn't know about.
287
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
288
Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
289
290
Purpose
The Fill In The Blank Hotword question object provides an editable underline in which a user can type a response into, after clicking on that underline to reveal an entry box.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Fill In The Blank Hotword question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the informational text [US Currency] and the Fill In The Blank Hotword question object are not one and the same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the question object.
The Fill In The Blank Hotword question object will permit you to specify one or more possible correct answers. The answers can be single or multi-word answers. Click the underline to allow typing of a response. The response will be inserted into the sentence, once entered. Pressing Tab or Enter or clicking elsewhere on the screen will cause the question to process the answer.
291
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Number Of Spaces For Answer Determines the length of the underline, which represents the actual question object. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
292
Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.
293
Match Text This it the typical setting and ONLY setting supported under DHTML. It indicates that you wish to match the text entered by the use to text you have preconfigured. OpenScript Expression This non-DHTML setting allows you to indicated that you wish to use programming logic to determine if the response is correct. If you choose this option the Response Text field turns into a Answer Definition field to permit you to enter an appropriate OpenScript expression. Response Text One or more words which represent an incorrect or a correct answer to the question. Answer Definition An OpenScript statement which will evaluate to True or False. If it evaluates to True, the answer is considered correct. If the it evaluates to False, the answer is considered incorrect. The value the user typed in can be reference by using the term IT. Example OpenScript Expression: [this would permit the user to type "A Dollar Bill" or "The Dollar", etc.
o o
IT contains "Dollar"
Match Case Permits you to specify that each character of the answer must be properly upper or lowercased in order to be considered a match. Match Word Order If your answer is comprised of multiple words, word order may be important. If the order of the words in the users response is important then check this option. Confirm if Recognized If the user types in an answer that is considered a match only because one of the above options (such as Word Order) was configured to allow the answer to be considered a positive match, you can enable this setting. The user will see a prompt asking if their answer is really a match to one of your answers, such as in this dialog:
Enable "Sounds Like" One of the problems with a Fill In The Blank question is that spelling counts. If the user misspells the answer, they are liable to get it wrong. ToolBook therefore incorporates a Sounds Like option which allows certain letter combinations to be incorrect but still consider their response to be a positive match.
294
For example if a valid response can be PHONE, the user can type in FONE and get it correct, because both sound the same when pronounced. o Ignore Punctuation If this option is enabled, all punctuation characters in the response are ignored when attempting to match the users response. Confirm By Asking If The User Meant This option is directly tied to the Confirm if Recognized option above.
Edit... This option allows you to change the configuration options for the list of possible answers.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses This will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they type in an answer and do anything to commit their answer (essentially anything that would move focus out of the field), and then attempt to re-answer it...they will be told that the question is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
295
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want any correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and any incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 100% of the answer and the 2nd correct one [because "buck" is slang for "dollar" so should not be worth as much] to be worth only 90% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 100% and 90% for the two options.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
296
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
297
o o
Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect, they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question. Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text. The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message. For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you probably didn't know about.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
298
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page.
299
Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
300
Match Item 1
DHTML or NATIVE Match item fields allow the user to drag an arrow from an answer field to an object on the page, such as a graphic. Place your target objects on the page before following the steps available in the Coach window.
Purpose
The Match Item 1 question is a combination of the Definable Match and Multiple Choice Field objects. Not only does it utilize fields like the Multiple Choice Field question object, which turn yellow when you click on them, it also allows you to draw a red arrow from one of the fields to another object on the page - just like the Definable Match question object does.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Match Item 1 question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Match the terms to their images.] and the Match Item 1 question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page. The 4 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The 4 textual definitions are actually the components of the question object.
When a user selects one of the answers the fillColor of the field turns Yellow to show the user that a selection has been made and the red arrow begins to draw. As soon as the user releases the mouse the field will revert back to white.
301
Match Item 1
In fact the question object will insist that your fields have a fillColor of White. If you attempt to change this fill color it will reset back to white the next time the question is reset. It seems to have been designed to force the non selected answers to be filled with white and the selected answers filled with yellow. There is an undocumented way that Instructor users (sorry Assistant users) can take control of the two color values, and it requires setting two properties of the question object - the same two properties that affect the Multiple Choice Field object. Displayed below is the Property Browser showing the 2 property settings you need to adjust. The ColorChosen and ColorNotChosen. You can change these to any RGB value you like.
Basic Use
The user can drag an arrow from the Fields objects to the images. This arrow is always red - unfortunately. The arrow tip will always snap to the center of the object it was matched to. The arrow tail will always snap to the center of the side of the field being dragged from.
In DHTML, the arrow will not appear as a straight line, but rather as a series of stair stepped lines. This is unfortunately the only way the browser can do this. Essentially Netscape cannot dynamically draw lines that are not vertical or horizontal, so this stair step approach is the only way Netscape can do it. Internet Explorer on the other hand can draw a diagonal line, but to keep the export consistent between browsers, it was determined necessary to force Internet Explorer to also draw stair stepped lines too.
302
Match Item 1
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
303
Match Item 1
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Each line will show the Text of the field object, plus an arrow and then the name of the correct matching object. Edit... Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different set of matching objects.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. Allow Multiple Responses To Matching Objects Choose this option if you want to allow the user to draw more than one arrow to the same object. If this is not enabled, a user is restricted to drawing only one arrow to a specific object. If an attempt is made to draw the second arrow, the first arrow drawn will disappear and permit the second arrow to remain.
304
Match Item 1
Reject Incorrect Answers or Unrecognized Objects If you want the arrow to only remain on the screen when a correct match is made, choose this option. If you leave this option unchecked, any arrow drawn will remain drawn on the screen even if the match was incorrect.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the first answer to be worth 70% of the answer and the 3 remaining ones to be worth only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 70% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 4 answers.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
305
Match Item 1
Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback When A Correct Match Is Made You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox.
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
306
Match Item 1
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
307
Match Item 1
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
308
Match Item 1
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
309
Match Item 2
DHTML or NATIVE A match item question allows the user to drag an arrow from an answer choice to an object such as a text field that displays a matching phrase.
Purpose
The Match Item 2 question is a combination of the Definable Match and Multiple Choice objects. Not only does it utilize buttons like the Multiple Choice question object, it also allows you to draw a red arrow from one of the fields to another object on the page - just like the Definable Match question object does.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Match Item 2 question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Match the terms to their images.] and the Match Item 2 question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page. The 4 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The 4 textual definitions are actually the components of the question object.
Basic Use
The user can drag an arrow from the Button objects to the images. This arrow is always red - unfortunately. The arrow tip will always snap to the center of the object it was matched to. The arrow tail will always snap to the center of the side of the button being dragged from.
310
Match Item 2
In DHTML, the arrow will not appear as a straight line, but rather as a series of stair stepped lines. This is unfortunately the only way the browser can do this. Essentially Netscape cannot dynamically draw lines that are not vertical or horizontal, so this stair step approach is the only way Netscape can do it. Internet Explorer on the other hand can draw a diagonal line, but to keep the export consistent between browsers, it was determined necessary to force Internet Explorer to also draw stair stepped lines too.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior.
311
Match Item 2
Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Each line will show the Text of the field object, plus an arrow and then the name of the correct matching object. Edit... Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different set of matching objects.
312
Match Item 2
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. Allow Multiple Responses To Matching Objects Choose this option if you want to allow the user to draw more than one arrow to the same object. If this is not enabled, a user is restricted to drawing only one arrow to a specific object. If an attempt is made to draw the second arrow the first arrow drawn will disappear and permit the second arrow to remain. Reject Incorrect Answers or Unrecognized Objects If you want the arrow to only remain on the screen when a correct match is made, choose this option. If you leave this option unchecked, any arrow drawn will remain drawn on the screen even if the match was incorrect.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
313
Match Item 2
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. But what if you wanted the first answer to be worth 70% of the answer and the 3 remaining ones to be worth only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 70% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 4 answers. Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
314
Match Item 2
Enable Feedback When A Correct Match Is Made You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback.
315
Match Item 2
Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
316
Match Item 2
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
317
Match Item 2
o o
Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
318
Order Text
NATIVE ONLY This object allows you to define an ordered list of words or phrases as the correct response to a question and test the user's ability to reconstruct the list in proper order. The user answers the question by dragging the phrases to the correct position. The lines of text are displayed in a random order when the object is reset. You specify when a question will be reset on the General tab of the Properties dialog box.
Purpose
The Order Text question allows the user to rearrange words in a field by dragging words to alternate locations within the same field. This object does not work in DHTML and therefore can be used only for Natively distributed applications.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure an Order Text question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text [Correctly arrange the words below] and the Order Text question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page.
Basic Use
The user can drag the words in the field to new positions in the field by clicking and dragging a word. Feel free to change the color, font size, etc. of the question object to fit your needs. The text to be used in this question is limited to a single paragraph of text, which can wrap to multiple lines if you like. If you attempt to use a carriage return in the text to force a second paragraph, the question will immediately switch to a mode where instead of moving words you are moving textlines. Essentially it mimics the behavior of the Drag Text catalog object. In Reader mode the words will be displayed to the user in a random order. In Author mode the words will be displayed to you in the correct order.
319
Order Text
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
320
Order Text
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be the possible answers to the question.
Text To Be Ordered This area will list all of words that need to be ordered, shown in the correct order. If you want to control the formatting of the text in the field (such as font size, color), do so by selecting the Field object contained within the question object and then use the Properties for Field settings to set the font characteristics. It is not possible to format the text on a character by character basis.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
321
Order Text
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Text To Be Ordered This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Each Element In Correct Position This value is computed automatically and cannot be changed. It is essentially the value achieved when you take 100 and divide it by the number of words in your question. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
322
Order Text
Enable Feedback After Each Move You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to trigger Delayed Feedback after each move. For this question type there is no real concept of Immediate Feedback.
323
Order Text
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
324
Order Text
o o
Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
325
Rating 1, 2, 3
DHTML or NATIVE This object provides answer choices based on a graduated scale of agreement. You display a statement for the user to evaluate in a text field that you can drag from the Catalog.
Purpose
The Rating Questions are actually just Multiple Choice question objects which provide answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices.
Details
The functionality of the Rating 1 and Rating 2 questions is identical to the standard Multiple Choice question object, and the Rating 3 question is identical to the Multiple Choice Field objects. Each come standard with 5 preconfigured responses, but you can add or remove responses if you like.
Removing Answers
If 5 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Rating question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following examples. Notice that the question text and the Rating question object are not one and the same object. The Rating question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Rating question object.
If using the Rating 3 object, when a user selects one of the answers the fillColor of the field turns Yellow to show the user that a selection has been made as shown below. In fact the question object will insist that your fields have a fill color of White. If you attempt to change this fill color it will reset back to white the next time the question is reset. It seems to have been designed to force the non selected answers to be filled with white and the selected answers filled with yellow. There is an undocumented way that Instructor users (sorry Assistant users) can take control of the two color values, and it requires setting two properties of the question object. Displayed below is the Property Browser showing the 2 property settings you need to adjust. The ColorChosen and ColorNotChosen. You can change these to any RGB value you like.
326
Rating 1, 2, 3
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points.
327
Rating 1, 2, 3
Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. In the case of a Rating question it would be normal that all possible answer are marked as Correct. By default this is how the question is configured. You are free to change this however if you feel the need to.
Add... This feature does NOT add more answer buttons to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 buttons then read the Adding More Answer section above. For a standard Multiple Choice question using the Add... button could be useful, but this feature does not really seem useful when the question type is being used for ratings. I would not suggest the use of the Add button in this case but if you want to know what it does anyway, read on. The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 buttons which are initially configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3 incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3 incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for
328
Rating 1, 2, 3
the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in the set of displayed answers.
Edit... This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Randomize Answers If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. I can't see any good reason to Randomize the answers to a Rating question but it you need that feature, here it is. Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct In the event your Rating question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option. I can't see any good reason to have this feature turned on since in a Rating the goal is to get a single feedback from the user, not multiple, but if you need that feature, here it is. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
329
Rating 1, 2, 3
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. In the case of a Rating question it would be normal that all possible answer are marked as Correct. By default this is how the question is configured. You are free to change this however if you feel the need to.
Score Weight Of Selected Answer For a Rating question the weighting of the question is set up as follows: o o o o o Strongly Agree = 100% of the score value. Agree = 80% of the score value. Neutral = 60% of the score value. Disagree = 40% of the score value. Strongly Disagree = 20% of the score value.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
330
Rating 1, 2, 3
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight. This is a setting you may want to turn on so that no matter what they select they will get the full point value for the question. Of you can leave it off and use the weight that is preconfigured for each possible response. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers. This is a feature that does not makes much sense to use with a Rating question. Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers. This is a feature that does not makes much sense to use with a Rating question.
331
Rating 1, 2, 3
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. In the case of a Rating question it would be normal that all possible answer are marked as Correct. By default this is how the question is configured. You are free to change this however if you feel the need to.
Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
332
Rating 1, 2, 3
o o
Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
333
Rating 1, 2, 3
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of the maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
334
Rating 1, 2, 3
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
335
Select Text
NATIVE ONLY The Select Text object allows the user to highlight text to choose an answer. The text cannot be changed at Reader level.
Purpose
The Select Text question object provides answer choices in the form of text in a field which permits the user to select one or more responses by highlighting text within the field. This question object does not function in DHTML, so it can only be used in a Natively distributed book.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Select Text question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text and the Select Text question object are not one and the same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above the question object.
In this example the terms Hard Drive, Floppy Disk and I/O are the 3 terms which need to be highlighted by the user. As seen in the next image, as the user highlights their choices the highlight stays in place as they highlight other areas of text.
336
Select Text
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
337
Select Text
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... This feature allows you to specify more text within the field which is considered to be an answer (correct or incorrect) for this question object. As you can see by looking at the Possible Answers section which I configured for this sample object, normally when adding a new answer you would select only one segment of text, as my sample shows. The scoring for my question depends on the user selecting all 3 segments of text and they get a 1/3 deduction for each one they fail to highlight. However this object will permit you to specify that a single answer is comprised of multiple selections - which would require that the user select all text segments of this specific answer response in order for this answer element to be considered correct. This is a confusing feature but powerful if and when you finally come across the need for such flexibility.
338
Select Text
The Name of the answer is any text you want to use to describe the selection choice. By default it is the same as the text selected, but you may want to give it a more meaningful name.
Edit... This option allows you to change the text which needs to be selected for a particular answer.
Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. In my example I could not use this feature since I needed to permit the user to select 3 segments of text. Snap Selection To Word Boundaries Trying to get a precise selection is difficult if the text is small. Sometimes you end up grabbing an extra space or perhaps not every character in the word(s) you are trying to select. This option, if checked, will automatically ensure the extra spaces are ignored and that if you select part of a word that the entire word is selected for you.
339
Select Text
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is unchecked and not worry about this Score Weight option. The question object will automatically have determined the appropriate weight of each of your answers and assigned the appropriate percentage. In my example each correct answer is worth 33% of the score. You are however free to adjust the percentage that each answer is worth.
Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages where each correct answer you specify will be worth 100% of the answer. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
340
Select Text
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled.
341
Select Text
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?"
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
342
Select Text
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback. Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
343
Select Text
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead. Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
o o
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
344
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE The slider object allows the user to drag the position indicator on a slider to answer a question. To display the current numeric position of the a slider at Reader level, you can add a slider position object from the Catalog to your page.
Purpose
The Slider question object provides answer choices in the form of a slide lever that allows the user to select an answer by moving the lever to the appropriate position. The Slider Position catalog object can also be used in conjunction with this object to show the current numeric position of the slider. These 4 question objects work the same way, however each looks a bit different. Use the one that best meets your needs.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Slider question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the instructional text and the Slider question object are not one and the same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above the question object.
The position of the selector (slider) can be adjusted by the user simply by click-dragging it. The range (currently 0-100) can be adjusted within the Extended Properties of the question object. You can configure an answer by using a specific number, or a range value which is considered correct, or incorrect. In my example, my one configured correct answer is any value between 50 and 70.
345
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.
Question Name Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name. Limit Time Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the question becomes locked. Limit Tries Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users are confused by this behavior. Automatically Reset Question When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature: o Never This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or leaving a page. Enter Page This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page, and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to answer the question again in order to get any points. Leave Page This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears the question score when leaving the page. Always This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
346
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered incorrect.
Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Add... This feature allows you to specify what number, or range value is considered to be a correct or incorrect answer.
o o
When... This shows the value or range statement that you want to use to indicate a correct or incorrect answer.
< <= = <> >= > AND
These buttons allow you to build your expression in the When... box. Edit... This feature allows you to modify the number, or range value that is considered to be a correct or incorrect answer.
347
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
o o
When... This shows the value or range statement that you want to use to indicate a correct or incorrect answer.
< <= = <> >= > AND
These buttons allow you to build your expression in the When... box. Delete This option removes an answer from the list. Minimum Value Your slider can have a range other than 0 - 100. Set the low end of your slider value with this option. Maximum Value Your slider can have a range other than 0 - 100. Set the high end of your slider value with this option. Cannot Change Responses If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. Set Slider Value On Reset Allows you to set the initial value of the slider when the user first sees the question. You can set it to 0, a Random position or any other value you like.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the question.
Score This Question When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
348
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data. Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not be included in the final score for the entire book. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Score Weight Of Selected Answer If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option. You are however free to adjust the percentage that each answer is worth. Automatic This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of percentages. Lowest Possible Score Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative number. Highest Possible Score By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish. For Partially Correct Responses These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers. o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the weighting you have applied to each answer. Report The Lowest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers Report the Highest Score This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book. You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not select all of the correct answers
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.
Enable Feedback At Time Of Response You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By default it is enabled. Possible Answers This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often. Select All Correct This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Select All Incorrect This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one. Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
Catalog Category: Questions (Various)
350
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text By default the value for this is no text at all. Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as "Are you sure?" Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
351
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are o All Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score. All Incorrect Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score. Partially Correct Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than 0%.
Play Media o o o None Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback. Media Clip Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback. Media Player Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
Media Clip This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Clip to play as feedback. Media Player This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon image over any media player on your page. Feedback Text Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.
Feedback Text This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the standard built in response text if you like. Show Only If Media Cannot Play This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore could not play an audio clip. Automatic Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
352
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
o o
Popup Window Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display. Use field or recordfield named "feedback" Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
353
Slider Position
DHTML or NATIVE A slider position object displays the current numeric position of the indicator on a slider at Reader level.
Purpose
This object is not a question object, but rather an accessory for the Slider question object. Since two of the Slider question objects do not show an actual number range as part of the question, the user does not have a way to judge when they have positioned the slider correctly. By dropping one of these on the page, as the user drags the slider, the Slider Position field will display the current position of the slider. Feel free to modify the look of this object by changing the Font, Color and Size settings.
354
Catalog Category
Use these objects to provide scoring behavior for your application. These objects provide for displaying feedback, scoring pages, questions, and applications and limiting answer time.
355
Show Delayed
DHTML or NATIVE Feedback is an automatic response to one or more answers chosen by the user. When a user clicks the Play Feedback button the delayed feedback for one or more answers is displayed. Delayed feedback is shown after an action such as clicking a specific button, not immediately after the answer is entered.
Purpose
This object will Score the specified question objects and show the Delayed Feedback of question objects on a page. It is identical in behavior to the Show Score button.
Details
When you configure a question object you have the ability to specify specific Delayed Feedback which will be revealed to the user after the question has been scored. Using this catalog object results in the questions being scored and feedback being displayed. When you score a question, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or alternately a field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the ones in this category of the Catalog. Shown below is a standard question object's Extended Properties dialog, showing the Delayed Feedback tab.
General Tab
The Extended Properties of this catalog object will permit you to configure various settings.
356
Show Delayed
Name The default name for this object is Show Delayed Feedback but you are free to change that to any name you like. Object to Score This option will allow you to choose which question object on the page you want to trigger the Delayed Feedback for. You also have the option of choosing <all> which will trigger the Delayed Feedback for all question objects on the page.
Options Tab
The Options tab will permit you to configure various settings.
Trigger Question Feedback This is the Master Switch for this object to control if it really triggers the Delayed Feedback or not. If you leave this unchecked, the Feedback will not trigger, but all the other functionality of this Options tab will still function. Display Question Score As This object also scores the question, so this option gives you the ability to control if the user gets to have Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.
The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply show the percent correct to the user. Lock Question To Prevent Further Responses Enable this option if you want the question object to be locked after this Show Delayed button is triggered. Reset Question Enable this option if you want the question object to be reset to an unanswered state after this Show Delayed button is triggered. WARNING If you enable this option, an LMS will see no score as a returned value, because the score will have been cleared by the Reset process. This is a setting you would normally NOT enable, unless you have a very specific need to do so and you understand the ramifications of doing so.
357
Show Delayed
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
358
Reset Lesson
DHTML or NATIVE When a user clicks the Reset button it causes the score for the book to be erased. All questions are reset to their initial state.
Purpose
If you are in need of a way to reset all questions in a book so that any scoring information currently accumulated is forgotten, and all questions are reset back to their unanswered state, then this is the catalog object that you will want to use.
359
Reset Page
DHTML or NATIVE The Reset Page button clears any answers made by the user. If the page is scored, the score is erased when the user clicks this button.
Purpose
If you are in need of a way to reset all questions on a specific page so that any scoring information currently accumulated for that page is forgotten, and all questions on that page are reset back to their unanswered state, then this is the catalog object that you will want to use.
360
Restart Lesson
DHTML or NATIVE When a student accesses your application through an AICC learning management system such as Ingenium or the Click2learn e-Learning Network, clicking this button resets all questions to their original state. After this button is clicked, navigation to the first page of the lesson occurs in the student's Web browser.
Purpose
If you are in need of a way to reset all questions in a book so that any scoring information currently accumulated is forgotten, and all questions are reset back to their unanswered state, then this is the catalog object that you will want to use. This object is nearly identical to the Reset Lesson button. The one added feature is that the Restart Lesson button will also take you to page 1 of the book.
361
Purpose
If you need to show the user their score, a tally of all question objects in the book, then this is the object to use. Note that it is not necessary to show the user their score in order for scoring data to be emailed via logging or returned to an LMS.
Details
When you score a quiz, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or alternately a field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the ones in this category of the Catalog.
General Tab
The Score Quiz object has a number of setting which can be configured to control its behavior.
Object Name By default the name of this object is Score Quiz, but you can rename it if you like.
Options Tab
The Options Tab has a number of setting which can be configured to further control its behavior. Notice there is no option to Trigger feedback. This object has no checkbox to trigger delayed feedback. See the Show Delayed catalog object if you want to both Score and show Delayed Feedback.
Add Up Score For All Questions And Display As This is the master switch for the Score Quiz button to control the scoring behavior. If you uncheck this box, none of the questions will be scored - which would make this button kind of useless.
362
Use the button at the right edge of the field to change the way the score will be displayed.
The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply show the percent correct to the user. Ignore Pages That Have The Page Property "Skip Navigation" Set To True The SkipNavigation page property can be used to control which questions get scored. Normally all questions on all pages get scored, but you can specify that questions on pages marked with the SkipNavigation property set to true be skipped in the score gathering process. Lock All Scored Questions To Prevent Further Responses If you want to prevent users from attempting to change the answers to the questions in the book after the Score Quiz functional has been triggered, then this feature should be checked. Reset All Questions If you want all of the questions reset to their unanswered state immediately after the Score Quiz button has been clicked, then enable this option. WARNING If you enable this option, the score will be shown to the user, but an LMS will see no score as a returned value, because the score will have been cleared by the Reset process. This is a setting you would normally NOT enable, unless you have a very specific need to do so and you understand the ramifications of doing so.
Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
363
Purpose
If you need to show the user their score for the current page, a tally of all question objects on that page, then this is the object to use.
Details
When you score a page, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or alternately a field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the ones in this category of the Catalog.
General Tab
The Score Quiz object has a number of setting which can be configured to control its behavior.
Name By default the name of this object is Score Page, but you can rename it if you like. Object To Score For this object, the value will always be <all>. Kind of makes you wonder why this option is even shown.
Options Tab
The Options Tab has a number of setting which can be configured to further control its behavior.
Trigger Question Feedback This feature is disabled for the Score Page object. Use the Show Feedback object instead if your need is to trigger Delayed Feedback in conjunction with scoring a page.
364
Display Question Score As You have the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.
The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example 3 out of 5). The Percent option will simply show the percent correct to the user. Lock Question To Prevent Further Responses Enable this option if you want the question object to be locked after this Show Delayed button is triggered. Reset Question Enable this option if you want the question object to be reset to an unanswered state after this Show Delayed button is triggered. Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
365
Show Score
DHTML or NATIVE Clicking the Show Score button at Reader level displays the score for answers to questions on the current page. The score displays in a score field, which can be found in the Scoring and Tracking category.
Purpose
This object will Score the specified question objects and show the Delayed Feedback of question objects on a page. It is identical in behavior to the Show Delayed button.
Details
When you score a question, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or alternately a field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the ones in this category of the Catalog.
General Tab
The Extended Properties of this catalog object will permit you to configure various settings.
Name The default name for this object is Show Score but you are free to change that to any name you like. Object to Score This option will allow you to choose which question object on the page you want to Score. You also have the option of choosing <all> which will score all question objects on the page.
Options Tab
The Extended Properties of this catalog object will permit you to configure various settings.
366
Show Score
Trigger Question Feedback This will control if it triggers the Delayed Feedback or not. If you leave this unchecked, the Delayed Feedback will not trigger. Display Question Score As You the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.
The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply show the percent correct to the user. Lock Question To Prevent Further Responses Enable this option if you want the question object to be locked after this Show Delayed button is triggered. Reset Question Enable this option if you want the question object to be reset to an unanswered state after this Show Delayed button is triggered. Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
367
Purpose
If you are using an LMS to track the results of your lesson, then this is one of 3 buttons you can use to tell the LMS that you are done.
Details
If the content was launched from an LMS: This specific button will also tell the LMS that you consider the lesson to be complete. After pressing this button, the tracking data will be returned to the LMS and the lesson is immediately exited.
If the content was launched outside of an LMS: Pressing this button will simply act as an exit button, closing the content window.
368
Purpose
If you are using an LMS to track the results of your lesson, then this is one of 3 buttons you can use to tell the LMS that you are done. NOTE This object does not appear in the Native view of the Catalog - but should. It functions just fine in DHTML or Native.
Details
If the content was launched from an LMS: This specific button will also tell the LMS that you consider the lesson to be unfinished, and that the user may want to complete it at a later time. After pressing this button, the tracking data will be returned to the LMS and the lesson is exited.
If the content was launched outside of an LMS: Pressing this button will simply act as an exit button, closing the content window.
369
Purpose
If you are using an LMS to track the results of your lesson, then this is one of 3 buttons you can use to tell the LMS that you are terminating the current session.
Details
If the content was launched from an LMS: This specific button will also tell the LMS that the current attempt on this lesson never happened, providing a way of canceling the attempt. After pressing this button, the tracking data is discarded and the lesson is exited.
If the content was launched outside of an LMS: Pressing this button will simply act as an exit button, closing the content window.
370
Feedback Field
DHTML or NATIVE A feedback field displays text that is automatically shown after the user answers a question. The name of this field must not be changed.
Purpose
The primary purpose for a Feedback field is to provide a place on your page to show Immediate or Delayed feedback text from Question objects. Secondarily it will automatically be used to show the Score if you do not have a Score field on your page or background.
Details
A Feedback field is nothing more than a field named Feedback. You can easily use your own field object - just ensure it is named Feedback. Below you will see the Immediate Feedback tab of a question object, where you configured feedback text.
When you click the icon at the end of the Feedback Text entry this dialog will appear allowing you to specify how to handle the display of your feedback text.
Notice you can control whether or not the feedback will always be popped up, or possibly shown in a Feedback field.
371
Score Field
DHTML or NATIVE The Score field is not visible at Reader level until the user clicks a Show Score button or one of the similar buttons in the Scoring section of the Scoring and Tracking category. The name of this field must not be changed.
Purpose
The primary purpose for a Feedback field is to provide a place on your page to show a score when a score has been requested to be shown. A variety of catalog objects can trigger the score to be shown, such as the Show Score or Score Quiz objects. Secondarily it will automatically be used to show Feedback if you do not have a Feedback field on your page or background, and feedback is triggered.
Details
A Score field is nothing more than a field named Score. You can easily use your own field object - just ensure it is named Score.
372
Graphic Timer 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE The timer object displays the number of seconds that remain to answer a question. The timer is used in conjunction with a question that has a time limit.
Purpose
If you are using the Limit Time option in a Question object, you can use any of the Graphic Timer objects to give the user an idea of how much time is remaining before the question will be locked.
Details
Seen below is the General tab of a standard question object, where it is possible to set how much time should be allowed for the question. You are permitted to specify the total number of seconds allowed for the current question.
General Tab
The Extended Properties for this object will permit you to configure this object.
Name The default name of this object is Timer but you can change it using this option. Object To Time Use this option to specify which Question object on the page you would like associated with the Timer.
373
Graphic Timer 1, 2, 3, 4
Options Tab
Various options are available in the Options tab.
Trigger Question Feedback This will control if it triggers the Delayed Feedback for the associated Question object or not. If you leave this unchecked, the Delayed Feedback will not trigger. Display Question Score As You the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.
The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply show the percent correct to the user. Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
374
Digital Timer 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE The timer object displays the number of seconds that remain to answer a question. The timer is used in conjunction with a question that has a time limit.
Purpose
If you are using the Limit Time option in a Question object, you can use any of the Digital Timer objects to give the user an idea of how much time is remaining before the question will be locked.
Details
Seen below is the General tab of a standard question object, where it is possible to set how much time should be allowed for the question. You are permitted to specify the total number of seconds allowed for the current question.
General Tab
The Extended Properties for this object will permit you to configure this object.
Name The default name of this object is Timer but you can change it using this option. Object To Time Use this option to specify which Question object on the page you would like associated with the Timer.
375
Digital Timer 1, 2
Options Tab
Various options are available in the Options tab.
Trigger Question Feedback This will control if it triggers the Delayed Feedback for the associated Question object or not. If you leave this unchecked, the Delayed Feedback will not trigger. Display Question Score As You the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.
The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply show the percent correct to the user. Send Message This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.
376
TEXT FIELDS
DHTML Mode View:
Catalog Category
Use text fields to present information on the page. Some of these objects are interactive (such as the Combo Box and List Boxes) and others are just static text holders.
377
Auto-Sizing Field
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has been enhanced by some OpenScript code to automatically adjust the height of the field if needed so that all of the text is visible in the field. It will increase or decrease the height of the field to tightly fit the text within.
Details
It is important to know when this resizing behavior activates: The field will not resize after it has been exported to DHTML. Once exported the size of the field is fixed. The field will resize anytime the page is reset, which includes when entering or leaving the page as well as when toggling from Reader to Author or Author to Reader level. At Reader Level if you type in the field, the field will auto-size as you type. At Author Level if you attempt to resize the field, it will trigger the auto-size behavior.
Extended Properties
Name Allows you to name your object, by default its name is simply Title. Auto Border If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when you go back to Reader level. Auto Size This enables or disabled the auto-sizing behavior. Turn off this checkbox to turn off this behavior.
378
Borderless
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to none.
Details
This object has no extended behavior, it is simply a field which is already configured to have no border showing. A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles: None Rectangle Scrolling Shadowed Raised Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they are really just the same object, with a single property changed. The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.
379
Call-out Bubble
DHTML or NATIVE Use a Call-out Bubble to identify an important feature of a graphic or photograph.
Purpose
The Call-out Bubble was my creation, and was added to ToolBook 8 while I was on the ToolBook development team. I created it because ToolBook was lacking such an object. It permits you to identify objects on your pages, as is typically the use of a call-out object. Note that there is another object in the catalog which is also used for call out purposes called the Call-out Text object.
Details
The Call-out Bubble is just a collection of ToolBook object grouped together with some OpenScript logic making it function. Since it is just ToolBook objects, feel free to change the colors of the objects (such a the yellow color). You'll have to select the various objects within the group object in order to control the color. This bubble can be resized and after doing so it will correctly readjust the size of the bubble to tightly fit all the text in the box. The trick is to adjust the Width of the bubble and the bubble will automatically adjust the height for you. The text in the bubble can be raw unformatted text or you can add richly formatted text if you like. Treat the text in the bubble just like any text field. You can change text color, size, make it bold, etc. Note that it will take several clicks to get your I-Beam into the field before you can edit the text. As you type new text the bubble will not automatically resize, however as soon as you click outside of the bubble, it will resize. Optionally you can edit the text in the Extended Properties. You can also adjust the position of the TAB by dragging it at Author level, allowing you to point to something very specific.
General Tab
There are a variety of settings you can adjust in the Extended Properties of this object, controlling the look of the bubble.
380
Call-out Bubble
Name Allows you to set the name of the object. By default the name will be Call-out Bubble. General Shape Your bubble can have rounded corners on it, or rectangular corners. By default it will be rounded. Tab Positions By default the Call-out Bubble comes out of the catalog with a Tab on the bottom edge of the object but you can choose to have the Tab on other sides of the bubble. You can even turn on multiple tabs at once. Each tab can be repositioned at Author level simply by dragging the tab to a new position on the edge it is anchored to.
Text Tab
Setting the text of the bubble can be done by directly editing the text on screen, or via this Text tab of the Extended Properties.
381
Call-out Text
DHTML or NATIVE Use a call-out to identify an important feature of a graphic or photograph. A call-out contains an arrow that connects to a text field.
Purpose
The Call-out Text object permits you to identify objects on your pages, as is typically the use of a call-out object. Note that there is another object in the catalog which is also used for call out purposes called the Call-out Bubble object.
Details
The Call-out Text object is just a collection of ToolBook object grouped together with some OpenScript logic making it function. Since it is just ToolBook objects, feel free to change the colors of the objects (such a the line color). You'll have to select the various objects within the group object in order to control the color. Trying to adjust the size of the Call-out Text object will result in the object snapping back to its old size. To resize the object first select the Field object within the Call-out Text object and the resize the field using the selection handles that appear around the selection.
To move the arrow to another location, simply drag the red target symbol to another location at Author level, and the arrow will follow.
382
Card
NATIVE ONLY You can present information as if it were a series of index cards in this field. Click the forward or back button to view each card.
Purpose
The Card object can be thought of as a set of index cards. The user will be able to flip through the text on the various cards.
Details
Unfortunately this is a non-DHTML object so you will only be able to use this within a Natively distributed book. To use, simply size the object to your desired size and then put all of the text in the text field area of this Card object while at Author level, and make sure you have two blank lines between the sections of text which you want to appear on different cards, as shown below.
When viewed at Reader level the Card object will only display the text for the index card the user is currently viewing. Notice there is a card counter in the lower left corner of the Card object. The user is free to use the Forward and Previous navigation buttons on the Card object to view the various cards.
The Card object only accepts plain text. If you attempt to enter richly formatted text, the Card object will remove all the formatting.
383
Combo Box
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE Use a Combobox when you need to present a list of choices.
Purpose
A Combo Box is very similar to a List Box in that it presents the user with a list of choices. In the case of a Combo Box, the user makes their choice by clicking on the drop down arrow to reveal the list to select from. When the selection is made the answer will appear in the main area of the Combo Box to indicate the current selection.
Details
In the Properties for Combo Box there are a variety of setting on the Draw and Behavior tabs.
I won't walk you through the basic behavior of a Combo Box, as that is beyond the scope of this book, however I will demonstrate how to detect a user selection and act on that selected value, using both OpenScript as well as the Actions Editor.
Actions Editor
In the Actions Editor you can detect the user choosing an option in a Combo Box by using the On Select event of the Combo Box. The text of the selection is passed to this event as a parameter named SelectedItemText.
384
Combo Box
OpenScript
In the OpenScript Editor you can detect the user choosing an option in a Combo Box by using the selectChange message for the Combo Box. The text of the selection is passed to this event as the first and only parameter.
385
Date Field
DHTML or NATIVE A date field displays the current date in a numeric format.
Purpose
The current date can be shown in this field. Unfortunately there are no Extended Properties that you can use to modify the format of the date. Instructor users would be better served to create their own Date field which formats the date as needed. Feel free to change the color and size of the text in the field as well as the font used, so that it looks appropriate for your needs.
386
Purpose
This object will display the current page number and the total page count, so that the user can tell where they are within the project.
Details
This object will count all pages in your book, but will exclude any page who's Skip Navigation property is set to true. You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation property by using the Behavior tab of the Properties for Page dialog as shown below.
387
Graphic List
DHTML or NATIVE A graphic list displays lines of text with your selected graphic image at the beginning of each line.
Purpose
This field will display a special image in front of each line of text in your field. By default this image is a red bullet image. The image will not appear while at Author level. NOTE This object is not fully functional in the shipping version of 8.5. If you add one to your book the red bullets will not appear. To fix this all you need to do is use the File menu inside of ToolBook to Open the following ToolBook file:
Instructor Users - C:\Program Files\click2learn\Instructor85\Catalog\Text Fields.wbk Assistant Users - C:\Program Files\click2learn\Assistant85\Catalog\Text Fields.wbk
Once the file opens, choose SAVE from the File menu, and choose YES to the prompt to do a special catalog reset. That's it, the problem is now fixed and the red bullets will appear as they should when you add this object to your book.
General Tab
The Graphic List object has various settings which can be configured using the Extended Properties.
Name You can name your field object using this option Auto Border If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when you go back to Reader level. Auto Size If this feature is turned on the field will increase or decrease in height as needed to tightly fit the text within. Resizing typically only occurs when the page is reset.
388
Graphic List
Options Tab
The image to be displayed can be configured on this tab.
Image Reference Use the Choose Button to specify which bitmap resource you want displayed in front of each line.
389
Inset
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Inset.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles: None Rectangle Scrolling Shadowed Raised Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they are really just the same object, with a single property changed. The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.
390
Marquee
NATIVE ONLY The marquee object displays text that constantly moves. You can set the movement to either scroll, slide, or bounce back and forth. The movement of the text is visible at Reader level, but not at Author level.
Purpose
A scrolling marquee effect can be achieved in ToolBook using this catalog object. It will scroll a line of text in a variety of ways depending on the settings configured in the Extended Properties. NOTE This object does not appear in the DHTML view of the catalog, however it does in fact work in DHTML but only in Internet Explorer. It will not function in Netscape. All you will see in Netscape is static text.
Extended Properties
Name By default the name of this object is Marquee, however you can change the object's name here. Text This is the text you wish to have scrolled in the Marquee window. Behavior Scroll: Text will slide into the field and out of the field Slide: Text will slide into the field and stop at the other end of the field Alternate: Text will slide into the field and then bounce back and forth off of each edge. Direction Determines the direction that the text enters the field, from the left or right. Speed Specifies the speed to scroll the text in milliseconds. Step Size This setting is meaningless to Native ToolBook and only has meaning to Internet Explorer when exported to DHTML. It determines how many pixels the text moves per step. Loop This setting is meaningless to Native ToolBook and only has meaning to Internet Explorer when exported to DHTML. It determines how many times the scrolling is repeated. Use a value of 0 for a never ending scroll. Use Alternate Pad Character A special character is used between the words to facilitate scrolling, however for some obscure fonts this character may show up as a visible character - which is not desirable. In that event, check this option to use a alternate character.
391
Purpose
A Multi-Select List Box permits you to offer your user a list of options and allow them to scroll through the list and choose one or more of the options.
Details
The primary thing you are likely to be interested in about a List Box is the Text of the option(s) chosen by the user. The process for determining what the user selected is different for the Actions Editor than it is for OpenScript. Below I will give you examples of how to do each. For both examples these two objects will be used. One is a Multi-Select List Box and the other is just a button to click on when all of your choices have been made. The button will get all the coding for the following examples. No code is placed in the List Box.
OpenScript Editor
Using the OpenScript Editor the List Box will not report the text of the lines selected, but rather will only report the text line numbers of all selected lines in the SelectedTextlines property. In order to get the Text of those lines you have to use those text line number references to access the text. The following example does just that, and then displays the text of the selected items separated by commas.
Actions Editor
Using the Actions Editor is even more confusing than the OpenScript method. To determine which lines have been selected, you must first access the ItemSelected "array" property of the List Box. This array contains one element for each line of text. So, for a 4 textline List Box the array will have 4 elements. To read the ItemSelected "array" property you have to first copy it into an array variable.
392
The actual text is stored is a different array property, called ItemText. To read the ItemText "array" property you have to first copy it into an array variable. Once both properties are stored in array variables, the For Each loop will be needed to step through each element of the arrays, and then comes the important part - determining if the text lines were selected or not. The ItemSelected array contains True - for any element selected, and False - for any element not selected. The following example demonstrates this mechanism for determining the text of each selected line.
393
Ordered List
DHTML or NATIVE An ordered list displays lines of text in an outline format. At Reader level, a numeral or alphabetical character is automatically placed next to each line of text. The outline formatting does not appear at Author level. To change the default indentation of any line of text, you can add a tab to the beginning of a line by pressing Ctrl+Tab.
Purpose
This object will permit you to create an outline of text. Each line of text will show an outline level character when viewed at Reader level or when Exported to DHTML. When viewed at Author level the outline characters will not show.
General Tab
There are a few configuration options available to you to control this object, as shown in the Extended Properties.
Name You can name your field object using this option Auto Border If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when you go back to Reader level. Auto Size If this feature is turned on the field will increase or decrease in height as needed to tightly fit the text within. Resizing typically only occurs when the page is reset.
Options Tab
Here you can control the alphanumeric numbering of the displayed text.
First Level Specify if the first level of text will be Roman Numerals, Alphabetical or Numeric.
394
Password
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE The password field will display an asterisk for each character typed. In the Actions Editor you can set or get the value of this field by accessing the text property. In OpenScript you can set or get the value of this field by accessing the ASYM_Text property.
Purpose
The Password field will permit a user to type in text and have only a Masking character appear rather than the text being typed. This is typically used for Password entry.
DHTML Details
When viewed in the browser, the masking character is controlled by the Operating System and Browser, so for some it may appear as an asterisk character and for others, perhaps a bullet character. You can set or get the real (non-masked) value typed into the field simply by accessing the Text property of the field.
You can set or get the real (non-masked) value typed into the field simply by accessing the ASYM_Text property of the field. If you read the Text property you will simply get masked value, which is likely to not be of any real use to you.
395
Raised
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Raised.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles: None Rectangle Scrolling Shadowed Raised Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they are really just the same object, with a single property changed. The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.
396
Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Rectangle.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles: None Rectangle Scrolling Shadowed Raised Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they are really just the same object, with a single property changed. The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.
397
Scrolling
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Scrolling.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles: None Rectangle Scrolling Shadowed Raised Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they are really just the same object, with a single property changed. The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.
398
Shadow Text 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE This field allows you to display letters with a dropped shadow, using any font available.
Purpose
The two Shadow Text objects are intended to permit you to display text which contains a drop shadow effect.
Details
The only difference between Shadow Text 1 and Shadow Text 2 is that the offset of the shadow if different. The basic behavior of this object is that as you type text, a shadow will show under the text. This is accomplished by a 2nd field being present at a slight offset position. You will find that it is very easy, while trying to add more text, to cause this catalog object to become out of sync with the shadow text, which results is a very messy looking bunch of text. Normally you can fix this little mess by simply toggling from Author to Reader and then back to Author level again, which causes the object to auto-fix itself. The color of the shadow is not within your control. It is automatically set to be a complimentary color.
Alternate Idea
Perhaps you want the shadow a different color, a different offset distance, a different offset direction? You can accomplish this by not using this object at all. Simply use a regular text field and when all of your text is in it, duplicate the field and layer them on top of each other. Set the color of the one behind to be an appropriate shadow color, and set the one on top to be any color you like.
399
Shadowed
DHTML or NATIVE If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.
Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Shadowed.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles: None Rectangle Scrolling Shadowed Raised Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they are really just the same object, with a single property changed. The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.
400
Purpose
A Single-Select List Box permits you to offer your user a list of options and allow them to scroll through the list and choose one of the options.
Details
The primary thing you are likely to be interested in about a List Box is the Text of the option chosen by the user. The process for determining what the user selected is different for the Actions Editor than it is for OpenScript. Below I will give you examples of how to do each.
Actions Editor
Using the Actions Editor, you access the SelectedItemText property of the List Box in order to determine the text of the currently selected option.
OpenScript Editor
Using the OpenScript Editor, there is no direct way to access the text of the selected line. The List Box will only report the text line number which was selected. Using that number you can then ask for that specific textline of the field.
401
Time Field
DHTML or NATIVE A time field displays the current time in a numeric format.
Purpose
The current time can be shown in this field. Unfortunately there are no Extended Properties that you can use to modify the format of the time. Instructor users would be better served to create their own Time field which formats the time as needed. Feel free to change the color and size of the text in the field as well as the font used, so that it looks appropriate for your needs.
402
Unordered List
DHTML or NATIVE In an unordered list, a bullet appears next to each line of text at Reader level. The bullet formatting is not visible at Author level. To change the default indentation of any line of text, you can add a tab to the beginning of a line by pressing Ctrl+Tab.
Purpose
This object will permit you to create a list of bulleted text. Each line of text will show a bullet character when viewed at Reader level or when Exported to DHTML. When viewed at Author level the bullet characters will not show.
Extended Properties
There are a few configuration options available to you to control this object, as shown in the Extended Properties.
Name You can name your field object using this option Auto Border If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when you go back to Reader level. Auto Size If this feature is turned on the field will increase or decrease in height as needed to tightly fit the text within. Resizing typically only occurs when the page is reset.
Details
Since every line of text will have a bullet in front of it, it is not possible to make a field look like this (a combination of some lines with bullets and some without):
In order to accomplish this look you would need to use two normal fields and one Unordered List and arrange them as shown below:
403